JP6908165B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Oite the gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, a liquid crystal display device game machine display device is provided, such as are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-325886

However, further improvement of interest is required. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for executing main control related to a game, a sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the like. The main control means is based on a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. Therefore, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, the first output means for outputting the discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the slave control means, and the predetermined acquisition condition are satisfied. Based on this, the discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for the discrimination of the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are acquired up to a predetermined number of specific information. The discrimination condition is satisfied with the discrimination information storage means configured to be memorable until the discrimination information is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means and the discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A second output means that can be output to the slave control means is provided before the slave control means, and the slave control means is output by the determination result signal output by the first output means and the second output means. Based on the signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the discrimination information signal and the discrimination result signal received by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal is obtained. Whether to execute the second effect according to the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the first effect executing means for executing the corresponding first effect and the signal receiving means. Based on the determination by the first execution determining means for determining and the determination by the first execution determining means that the second effect is to be executed, one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the first setting means for setting the execution of the second effect over the execution period and the signal receiving means, the specific information according to the received discrimination information signal. Based on the information storage means configured to be storable until the corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, with the predetermined number of information as the upper limit, and the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, the second All the specifics stored in the information storage means based on the state setting means for setting the suppression state in which the setting of the execution of the effect is suppressed and the predetermined conditions set in advance are satisfied. Predetermined data that is the result of the predetermined processing, which is data composed of a predetermined processing means for performing a predetermined process for information according to a predetermined rule at a time and a group of data. The specific condition is satisfied, and the means for terminating the suppression state and the termination means for terminating the suppression state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the suppression state is set. Taking this as an opportunity, the second execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined storage area, and the second execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect, the first 2 A second setting means for setting the execution of the second effect over the execution period of the first effect, which is executed after the determination, based on the determination that the effect is to be executed. The predetermined condition is composed of conditions that can be satisfied at least between the time when the suppression state is set and the time when the determination by the second execution determination means is executed, and the predetermined data is the information. It is composed of data that can at least identify whether or not the specific information stored in the storage means includes the specific information based on the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. conditions, Ru conditions der a new determination by the determination means may established when becomes executable.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes storage means capable of accommodating the main control means in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the main control means for executing the main control related to the game and the sub-control means for performing the control based on the control signal output from the main control means are provided. The main control means is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminant result. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, the first output means for outputting the discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means to the slave control means, and the discrimination means The discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for discrimination and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are limited to a predetermined number of specific information, and the acquired discrimination information is the discrimination means. The discriminant information storage means configured to be memorable until it is used for the discrimination and the discriminant information signal based on the discriminant information acquired by the discriminant information acquisition means are controlled by the slave control before the discriminant condition is satisfied. A second output means capable of being output to the means is provided, and the slave control means includes the discrimination result signal output by the first output means, the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination information signal. Based on the signal receiving means configured to be able to receive at least the above and the discrimination result signal received by the signal receiving means, the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal is executed. The first effect determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect according to the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the determination by the first execution determination means, the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the first setting means for setting the execution of the effect and the signal receiving means, specific information according to the received discrimination information signal is provided with a predetermined number of information. As an upper limit, the setting of the execution of the second effect is suppressed based on the information storage means configured to be memorable until the corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. Based on the fact that the state setting means for setting the suppression state to be performed and the predetermined predetermined condition are satisfied , all the specific information stored in the information storage means can be stored in advance at once. A predetermined processing means for performing a predetermined process according to a predetermined rule and a data composed of a group of data, which is a result of the predetermined process, is stored in a predetermined storage area. The predetermined means and the termination means for terminating the suppression state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the suppression state is set, and the predetermined condition when the specific condition is satisfied. Using the predetermined data stored in the storage area, it is determined that the second effect is executed by the second execution determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect and the determination by the second execution determination means. Based on the above, the predetermined condition includes at least one or a second setting means for setting the execution of the second effect over the execution period of the first effect, which is executed after the determination. It is composed of conditions that can be satisfied between the time when the suppression state is set and the time when the determination by the second execution determination means is executed, and the predetermined data is the specific data stored in the information storage means. The information is composed of data that can at least identify whether or not the specific information based on the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result is included, and the specific condition is newly added by the discrimination means. Ru conditions der capable satisfied when the Do determination becomes feasible.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the three symbol display devices in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the continuous notice effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the continuous notice effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the change with time of the effect mode from the time when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined with the two reserved balls to the time when the continuous advance notice effect is executed and one variable display is executed. Is a diagram schematically showing. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the defined content of the above, and (c) is the figure which schematically showed the defined content of the second random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the definition of the variation pattern table for jackpot in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content schematically, (c) is the figure which showed the specified content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal) in 1st Embodiment schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) in a form. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. .. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the notice selection table in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the OR data generated when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the structure of the random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. Is a block diagram showing the above, and FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the hit random number range pattern table. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. be. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the point selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the subordinate random number table in the second embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the selection table for cancellation in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the random number range command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the value of the high expectation type flag in the third embodiment and the expectation of the lottery result. It is the figure which showed the correspondence relationship with. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a figure which shows typically the time-dependent change of the lottery state after a big hit winning. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the release time discrimination processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the ending selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the detour accessory in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the jackpot displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is opened. It is a front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being done. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment is completely opened, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the opening / closing door of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state which was completely closed. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the time course of the state of the right specific winning opening when the opening pattern capable of V winning is set in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the sixth embodiment. In the form, it is a figure which shows typically the time-dependent change of the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when the opening pattern which is difficult to win V is set. FIGS. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing in more detail the state of the opening / closing door during the opening period of 1 when the opening pattern capable of winning V in the sixth embodiment is set. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of jackpots in which a V-winning open pattern is set in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 7 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in the probability change state and the time saving state which are displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table, and (b) is the main control in the seventh embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 8 executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches the game ball to the front region of the game board 13 and the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sandy beach stage" and a "deep sea stage". ing. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "sandy beach stage" → "deep sea stage" "→" Sandy beach stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sandy beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the 40 to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the ball launching unit 112a is allowed to be driven inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for pressing, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the game ball during the pressing operation, and variable that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. It has a built-in resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The game ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the lower plate 50 in front view. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "senryobako") for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a substantially circular area (a game ball in which a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed by dividing the front surface of the game board 13 by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. Is the area where

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2), and the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 may return to the ball guide passage again. Be prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69. , The momentum is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the game ball enters the first entry port 64, and when the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the normal symbol (normal symbol) ( A lottery for the second symbol) will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, wins a prize for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 gaming balls). (Up to) is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of game balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbols, "Big hit A" and "Big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to these big hit types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a game ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is shown by the display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the game ball in an attempt to make the specific winning opening 65a win, so that many game balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the game ball enters the first entry port 64. It becomes easy to do. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). When the jackpot type is "big hit A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit of the special symbol. On the other hand, after the end of "Big Hit B", as an added value, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, the "normal symbol time reduction state" (normal symbol time reduction medium) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the game ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. .. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state (the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving).

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the "high probability state of the special symbol" is reached after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot. It is changing whether it becomes "normal symbol time saving state". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is lengthened, or the number of times for opening the electric accessory 64a per hit of the normal symbol is increased. Is also good.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the change of the game balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of certain game balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a game ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Will be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol, which is a kind of symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, is composed of nine main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and a sub symbol consisting of a shell-shaped symbol. It is configured. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 5/6 of the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/6 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, a notice character, and the like.

On the display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper row, interruption, and lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols including 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, in the main display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen (see FIG. 4A). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed on the assumption that a jackpot has occurred.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "normal symbols". When "big hit B", which is a 16R normal big hit, occurs, the combination of the same normal symbols is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "probability variation symbols". When the combination of the same probability variation symbols is stopped and displayed, the 16R probability variation jackpot "big hit A" is generated. In some cases where "big hit A" occurs, after the same combination of normal symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect (so-called promotion effect) in which the normal symbol is changed to a probabilistic symbol is executed. NS. As a result, even when the normal symbols are (or are likely to be) aligned, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the probabilistic jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol row. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols that are variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as symbols.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times the ball can be entered is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number symbol (symbol of "○") is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and is reserved according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of balls is four. When the number of reserved balls symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls. In the example of FIG. 4B, an example in which two reserved ball number symbols are displayed is shown, indicating that the number of reserved balls is two.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first winning opening 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls may be a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four may be the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous advance notice effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is an effect in which the same type of advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays. Whether or not this continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined when a new start winning prize for the first entry port 64 is detected. When it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time when the new start prize is detected and the variable display based on the new start prize. Although the details will be described later, the decision rate of the continuous advance notice production is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the lottery result of the new start prize is out of order. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit.

5 (a) and 5 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a variable display executed based on a reserved ball for which a continuous advance notice effect is set, other than the reserved ball executed last. be. FIG. 5A shows a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 is changing. As shown in FIG. 5A, during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the third symbol with the same number attached to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 5A, the main symbols with the number "3" are displayed in the center of the upper symbol row Z1 and on the right side of the lower symbol row Z2, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in a mode in which the surroundings emit light (a mode different from the other third symbols). This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the mode in which the surroundings of the main symbol emit light is referred to as "a mode wearing an aura".

Then, as shown in FIG. 5B, even when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the main symbol with the number "3" in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It is stopped and displayed in the form of wearing an aura. As a result, even though the combination of the displayed symbols is an out-of-order combination, the expectation that it will be a big hit (the lottery result corresponding to the big hit is included in the reserved ball) will be improved. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode when the final variable display in the continuous advance notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the final variation display of the continuous advance notice effect, the same number is added on one of the effective lines. The main symbol is displayed as a stop, and the main symbol with the same number is displayed in an aura-clad manner. In the example of FIG. 6A, the case where the main symbols with the numbers “3” are stopped and displayed on the effective line L4 is illustrated. The state in which the symbol sequence of 1 (middle symbol sequence Z2) is changing and the main symbol with the same number is stopped and displayed on the effective line is referred to as a reach state. In the first embodiment, the reach state is always generated at the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. That is, the start of the continuous advance notice effect can be determined only when the new start prize is the lottery result corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the reach state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that at least a reach state will occur at the time when the continuous advance notice effect is started, so that the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved. can.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the reach state occurs, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR1 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and the display area HR1 is "reached !!". Is displayed. The display content of the display area HR1 makes it easier for the player to understand that the reach state has occurred.

FIG. 6B shows an example of a display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect, and a big hit is notified. When the jackpot is notified by the continuous notice effect, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol wearing the aura, which is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, respectively, has already been displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the effective line where the main symbol that is displayed as stopped is placed. That is, an effect is executed in which the same numbers are attached and the main symbols in the aura-clad manner are aligned on the effective line of 1. FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the main symbols with the numbers “3” are aligned on the effective line L4. By aligning three main symbols with the same number on the effective line, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot has been achieved. In the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, the characters "Congratulations !!" are displayed to congratulate the big hit. This can give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the first embodiment, in each variation display in which the continuous notice effect is set, the main symbols that are stopped and displayed with the aura are all configured to be the main symbols with the same numbers. There is. That is, in the first variation display of the continuous notice effect, if the main symbol with the number "3" is stopped and displayed with the aura in each symbol column Z1 to Z3, the variation after the second time is displayed. Also in the display, the three main symbols with the number "3" are stopped and displayed with the aura. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to each variation display mode in the continuous advance notice effect of 1.

In addition, although the illustration is omitted, there are a plurality of advance notice effects executed in each variable display in which the continuous advance notice effect is set, in addition to the effect in which the stop symbol is changed to a mode wearing an aura (notice effect A). exist. Specifically, when the fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped, the main symbol with the same number freezes (notice effect B) and the main symbol with the same number hits the lightning bolt. The effect (notice effect C) is provided at least as a type of continuous advance notice effect. The notice effect C is the type with the highest expectation of a big hit, and the notice effect A is the type with the lowest expectation of a big hit. Further, the expectation level of the advance notice effect B is set to be higher than that of the advance notice effect A and lower than that of the advance notice effect C. In this way, by making the degree of expectation of a big hit different depending on the type of continuous advance notice effect, it is possible for the player to pay attention to the type of continuous advance notice effect as well.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a time-dependent change in the effect mode when the continuous notice effect is set will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a state of time-dependent changes in the effect mode when a new start winning prize is detected and a continuous advance notice effect is determined in a state where two reserved balls are present.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the start winning prize (winning A in the upper left of FIG. 7) is detected during the execution of the normal variable display (that is, the continuous advance notice effect is not set) in the state where two reserved balls exist. , The determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. If it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect by the judgment based on the winning A, the fluctuation display based on the two reserved balls held at that time and the fluctuation display based on the winning A are continuous over the fluctuation time. Set so that the notice effect is executed. More specifically, the value of the notice count counter 223i indicating the remaining number of continuous notice effects is set to 3, which is the number of times the continuous notice effects are executed, and the determined types of continuous notice effects (notice effects A to C). The value of the notice type flag 223k is updated according to any). As a result, the continuous notice effect is started from the next variation display (variation display based on the oldest reserved ball that is held when the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided, a state in which the lottery of the continuous notice effect is prohibited (hereinafter, referred to as a notice lottery prohibition state) is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being determined in duplicate during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. More specifically, if the configuration is such that whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined based on the detection of a new start prize even during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the type of the advance notice effect is changed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. There is a possibility of switching. For example, if a new start prize is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect B is set to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and the execution of the advance notice effect A is decided, the advance notice effect B is determined. Is cut off, and there is a risk that the next fluctuation will switch to the advance notice production A. That is, switching from a production type with a relatively high expectation (notice production B) to a production type with a low expectation (notice production A) may disappoint the player. In addition, when a continuous advance notice effect of the same effect type is newly determined during execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed over a number of variable displays equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls held at the start of the continuous advance notice effect. The notice production will be executed. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand which holding ball should have a sense of expectation, so that the meaning of the production may be difficult to understand.

In addition, as a method of solving these problems, it is allowed to judge whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed only when the start winning prize corresponding to the big hit is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect that is finally out of order. In addition, it is also conceivable to configure the effect type of the continuous notice effect additionally determined to be higher than the effect type of the continuous notice effect being executed. However, in this case, every time a start prize is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform control processing for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the advance notice type. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, one variable display (first detected in the advance notice lottery prohibited state). It is prohibited to newly determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed until the end of the variable display based on the winning prize B). As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect type from being switched during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, or to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, at the time of starting prize, it is determined whether or not the advance notice lottery is prohibited (whether or not the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h, which will be described later) is turned on, and if the advance notice lottery is prohibited, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed Since it is only necessary to perform a simple control of skipping the determination process of the pachinko machine 10, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned advance notice lottery prohibition state is set during the execution of the three variable displays in which the continuous advance notice effect is set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, when a start prize is detected during the execution of the second or third variation display of the continuous notice effect, the process of determining whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the start prize is determined. Is skipped. In addition, the advance notice lottery prohibition state continues during the execution period of the variable display executed for the first time after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, and when the first variable display is completed after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, the advance notice lottery is performed. The prohibited state is released. Therefore, if a new start prize is detected during the execution of the first variable display after the continuous notice effect is completed, the process of determining whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed for the start prize is performed by the continuous notice effect. It will be skipped as if it were running. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being started again immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect from continuing endlessly. If the setting of the continuous advance notice effect is allowed from the first variable display executed after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, the variable display based on the start prize that triggered the start of execution of the first continuous advance notice effect ends. Even after that, the production mode will be as if the continuous advance notice production is continuing. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may not know what the continuous advance notice effect was based on, and the meaning of the continuous advance notice effect may be misunderstood. In other words, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed based on the lottery result (variation type) pre-read at the time of the start winning, but is an effect that simply changes the effect mode over a fixed number of variation displays. There is a risk of misunderstanding. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, at least one variation display can be executed in a normal mode (a mode without a notice effect), so that one continuous advance notice effect can be performed. It is possible to easily make the player understand whether or not the game has been completed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand how many times the variable display (what number of the reserved ball) should be expected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is lifted, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and the determination result is determined. Based on the above, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by taking into account the lottery results of all the reserved balls, the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation.

In other words, if the configuration is such that whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined in order from the reserved ball whose start winning is detected in order from the oldest reserved ball, the continuous advance notice effect is not determined in terms of time. May be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is a lottery result with a relatively low expectation (for example, a reserved ball that is out of the normal reach), and the expected degree is in the new reserved ball in time. When a high hold ball (for example, a hold ball that causes a super reach and becomes a big hit) is included, the expectation level is set even though the continuous notice effect is set for the hold ball with a low expectation level. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which a continuous advance notice effect is not set for a high hold ball. Therefore, there is a possibility that the expectation for the continuous advance notice production will be impaired.

On the contrary, if the timing of detecting the start winning is set to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed in order from the new hold ball in time, the continuous notice is not determined in terms of the old hold ball. There is a possibility that the production will be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is a lottery result with a relatively low expectation (for example, a reserved ball that comes off after normal reach), and the expected degree is among the reserved balls that are old in time. If a high hold ball (for example, a hold ball that causes a super reach and becomes a big hit) is included, the expectation level does not end with the hold ball with high expectation that is executed first. The continuous notice production will continue until the fluctuation display based on the low hold ball. That is, there is a risk that the player will have the impression that the continuous advance notice production has become a dent.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the reserved balls. It is possible to set a continuous advance notice effect that continues until the lottery result with the highest expectation. Therefore, even though the continuous notice effect is set for the hold ball with low expectation, the continuous notice effect is not set for the hold ball with high expectation, or the hold with high expectation in the middle of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are digested and the reserved balls with low expectations are digested at the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set from the time when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined to the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of the first variable display. However, it is not limited to this. The conditions for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be arbitrarily set, and for example, the number of variable displays in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set may be increased (for example, 5 times). With this configuration, more normal modes (modes without notice effects) of variable display can be displayed between the end of one continuous notice effect and the start of the next continuous notice effect. Since it can be executed, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize whether or not one continuous advance notice effect has been completed. Further, as the number of times of the variable display in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set is increased, the chance of determining the continuous advance notice effect decreases, so that the rarity of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she was able to see the unusual production just by starting the continuous advance notice production, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the cancellation condition of the advance notice lottery prohibition state is defined by the number of variable display times (after the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of one variable display), but the cancellation condition is It is not necessarily limited to the number of variable displays. For example, the cancellation condition may be determined by the elapsed time after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. More specifically, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be canceled when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the continuous advance notice effect is completed. With this configuration, even if there is a player who has finished the game at the end of the continuous notice production, if the next player starts the game after the lapse of a predetermined period, the notice lottery prohibition state will be canceled. The game can be played in the state where it is played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a successor player starts the game from the state in which the advance notice lottery is prohibited, so that the continuous advance notice effect can be further enjoyed.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set from the end of the continuous advance notice effect to the end of one variable display, but the advance notice is made immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. The lottery prohibition state may be released. In this case, it may be configured so that the player can easily identify whether or not it is the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect from the effect mode. With this configuration, the period for which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set can be shortened, so that the chances of executing the continuous advance notice effect can be further increased. As a specific example of the effect mode indicating whether or not it is the final variation display of the continuous notice effect, for example, a configuration may be configured in which the remaining number of fluctuations of the continuous notice effect is counted down. In addition, a display suggesting the end (for example, the character "end") may be displayed in the final variable display, or the same song may be continuously played during the continuous advance notice effect. The music may be stopped at the timing when the last fluctuation display in the above is completed. Further, during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured so that the reach state does not occur in the variation display other than the last variation display. That is, during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the reach state may be displayed to suggest that it is the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the game ball passes through the ordinary entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is used for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. NS. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more, as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a game ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entry switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the first entry switch. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the game ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed as.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out a game ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. It is specified in association with. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" (see 202b1 in FIG. 9B). Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 9 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 29). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a game ball is provided in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the game ball wins the first entry slot 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in a special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the case of the probabilistic state of the special symbol, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9", and "0 to 9". If it is any of 9 ”, it is determined that it is a big hit. The first hit random number counter C1 has 400 possible values of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that becomes a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). Further, in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Of the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", only one of the judgment values that becomes a big hit is "0", so the special symbol is placed in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the game ball wins the first entry slot 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A" (FIG. 9). See 202b1 in (b)). Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. ..

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the game ball wins the first entry slot 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the entry time of the game ball into the first entry port 64. The table for time is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is obtained by the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 10A to 10D. As shown in FIG. 10A, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). ) And the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined. Various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for detachment (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

For out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "0 to 149" for the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various super reach out of the range of "150 to 197" (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As described above with reference to FIG. 9 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28" (FIG. 9 (c). ) 202c1). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 9 (c)). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the fluctuation display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the opening of the first ball entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 29) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. It has at least 203e and a time-saving and medium-time counter 203f.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning prize, a jackpot of the original special symbol is obtained. Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a. Further, if the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on various information notified by the winning information command.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 25).

When the game ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. Not done (S603: No in FIG. 26).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability variation flag 203e is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot A of the special symbol (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, it is set to off when setting the start of the big hit (see S213 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol is drawn based on the first random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e is in the state. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and each time a jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 30). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f and the state of the probability variation flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variation flag 203e is ON. If so, it is determined that the time is shortened for the normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined as the normal state of the normal symbol, and based on the second random number table for the low probability time, it is determined. A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 25).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and controls to these via the input / output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball, the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. be. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 13. First, FIG. 12A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 12A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a notice selection table 222b.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify a detailed display mode of the variation effect based on a rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main control device 110. Be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, a notice effect setting process, which is one process in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36), is performed. In (see FIG. 37), one variation pattern (detailed display mode of the variation effect) is determined (specified) from the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a (see S4603 and S4605 in FIG. 37). The variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table 222a defines information including the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the type of the advance notice effect.

The advance notice selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. The details of the advance notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the advance notice selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 13, the advance notice selection table 222b is a data table in which the range of random number values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) for which each of the advance notice effects A to C is determined is defined for each variation type. When determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223f belongs to any of the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) associated with each advance notice effect. , The execution of the continuous advance notice effect of the effect type associated with the range is determined. On the other hand, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223f does not belong to any random value range defined in the advance notice selection table 222b, it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is not executed.

The notice selection table 222b defines six types of variation: special reach, super reach, normal reach, special reach, super reach, and normal reach. Other types of fluctuation (long deviation, short deviation) are not specified, so they are not subject to the execution of continuous notice production. By limiting the target for which the continuous advance notice effect can be executed to the variable type in which the reach state occurs, it is guaranteed that at least the reach state is developed when the continuous advance notice effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per special reach, the "notice effect A" is associated with the range of 10 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 9". It is defined that "notice effect B" is associated with the range of 35 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 44", and 15 random values of "45 to 59". The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). Since the production lottery counter 223f is updated in the range of 100 values of "0 to 99", the ratio of "notice production A" determined when the variation type is per special reach is 10% (10 / 10 /). 100), the ratio of determining "notice effect B" is 35% (35/100), and the ratio of determining "notice effect C" is 15% (15/100). In addition, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effect is not determined is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per super reach, the "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of 10 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 9". "Notice effect B" is specified in association with the range of 30 random numbers (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 39", and 10 items of "40 to 49" are specified. The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per super reach, the ratio of determining "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of determining "notice effect B" is 30% (30/100). ), And the ratio at which "notice effect C" is determined is 10% (10/100). In addition, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effect is not determined is 50% (50/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is lower than in the case of a special reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the advance notice effect A is determined is higher than that per special reach, while the rate at which the advance notice effect C is determined is lower.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per normal reach, the "notice effect A" is associated with the range of 10 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 9". "Notice effect B" is specified in association with the range of 15 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 24", and 5 disturbances of "25 to 29" are specified. The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the numerical value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per normal reach, the ratio of determining "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of determining "notice effect B" is 15% (15/100). Therefore, the ratio at which "notice effect C" is determined is 5% (5/100). In addition, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effect is not determined is 70% (70/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is lower than in the case of a special reach or a super reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the advance notice effect A is determined is higher than that per the special reach or the super reach, while the rate at which the advance notice effect C is determined is low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the fluctuation type is out of the special reach, the "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of 10 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 9". It is specified by attaching, and "notice effect B" is specified in association with the range of eight random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 17", and two of "18, 19". The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the ratio of determining "notice effect A" is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of determining "notice effect B" is 8% (8/100). ), And the ratio at which "notice effect C" is determined is 2% (2/100). In addition, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effect is not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is lower than in the case of per special reach, per super reach, and per normal reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the advance notice effect A is determined is higher than that per the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach, while the rate at which the advance notice effects B and C are determined is low. Become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the fluctuation type is out of super reach, "notice effect A" corresponds to the range of 9 random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 8". It is specified with the addition, and "notice effect B" is associated with one random value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) "9" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the fluctuation type is out of super reach, the ratio of "notice effect A" determined is 9% (9/100), and the ratio of "notice effect B" determined is 1% (1/100). ) On the other hand, there is no possibility that "notice production C" will be decided. In addition, the ratio at which the continuous advance notice effect is not determined is 90% (90/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous advance notice effect is determined is lower than in the case of per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach, and out of special reach. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the advance notice effect A is determined is higher than that of the special reach, the super reach, the normal reach, and the special reach, while the advance notice B is determined. The percentage is low. In addition, the possibility that the advance notice effect C will be decided is 0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the fluctuation type is out of the normal reach, the "notice effect A" is associated with the range of five random values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) of "0 to 4". (See 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of the special reach, the ratio of determining the "notice effect A" is 5% (5/100), but there is no possibility that the advance notice effects B and C are determined. Moreover, the ratio that the continuous advance notice production is not decided is 95% (95/100). That is, the rate at which the continuous notice effect is determined is lower than that of other variable types that are subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the rate at which the advance notice effect A is determined is higher than that of other variable types, while the possibility that the advance notice effects B and C are determined is zero.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the rate of determining the continuous advance notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss. Further, the fluctuation type having a high expectation (long fluctuation time) is configured to have a higher ratio of determining the continuous advance notice effect than the fluctuation type having a low expectation (short fluctuation time). As a result, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is started, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the rate at which the notice effect A is determined is lower in the variation type with a high expectation than in the variation type with a low expectation, while the rate at which the notice effect C is determined. Is configured to be high. Therefore, when the advance notice effect C is started, the player can be strongly expected to be a big hit, while when the advance notice effect A is started, the final change of the continuous advance notice effect can be expected. You can watch the production with a sense of tension until the display. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of advance notice effect and perform the game.

In addition, since the advance notice production B is configured so that it is not selected (determined) when the normal reach is out of reach, when the advance notice effect B is started, it will develop to be more than super reach (out of super reach, out of special reach) or will be a big hit. Is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. Further, since the notice effect C is configured not to be selected (determined) when the normal reach is out and the super reach is out, it is confirmed that the notice effect C will develop into a special reach or become a big hit when the notice effect C is started. Therefore, when the advance notice effect C is started, it is possible to give the player a stronger expectation that the player will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (b). FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. The time counter 223e, the effect lottery counter 223f, the game state storage area 223g, the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h, the advance notice number counter 223i, the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j, the advance notice type flag 223k, and the other memory area 223z. At least it is provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize is detected in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning prize. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area). Is remembered in. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area. In other words, the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the winning information storage area 223a are counters stored in the hold 1st area to the 4th area in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a of the main control device 110, respectively. Data corresponding to the lottery result based on the value is stored.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect based on the various information when various information based on the new start winning is notified by the winning information command. That is, from the various notified information and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect with reference to the above-mentioned advance notice selection table 222b, and the effect type of the continuous advance notice effect. By executing the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to continuously hold the expectation for the jackpot over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice lottery prohibition state for prohibiting the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is set. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state ends, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the information stored in all the areas of the winning information storage area 223a. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, it is also determined up to which reserved ball the continuous advance notice effect is to be continued. A method of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, which is executed based on the end of the advance notice lottery prohibition state, will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a part of the control process executed with reference to the information of each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is terminated (released). As shown in the broken line of the horizontally long substantially rectangular shape of FIG. 14, each area of the winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store 1 byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 14, each bit of the 1-byte data is associated with a variation type, and the on bit indicates the variation type of the winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, in order from the most significant bit, "per special reach", "per super reach", "per normal reach", "out of special reach", "out of super reach", "out of normal reach". , "Long deviation", and "Short deviation" are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 14, since the second bit of the hold first area is 1 (on) and the other bits are off, the “longout” associated with the second bit is the hold first. It is the lottery result (variable type) indicated by the data stored in the area. Similarly, in the reserved second area of the winning information storage area 223a, the fifth bit associated with "special reach out" is set to 1 (on), so the lottery indicated by the data in the reserved second area. The result (variation type) is "out of special reach". Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the second area on hold is “short deviation”, and the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data in the third area on hold is “per super reach”. Since the data of the execution area is not used for this control, the illustration is omitted.

When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, as shown in FIG. 14, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each hold area excluding the hold first area is calculated. The logical sum is a logic that is true (1) if at least one of the data is true (1), and false (0) if all of the plurality of data is false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 14, the data "010100" is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reason why the reserved first area is excluded is that the continuous advance notice effect in the first embodiment is configured to be executed over at least two variable displays. In other words, if the hold 1st area is targeted for determining whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed, the continuous notice effect may be set only for the variable display of 1 based on the data of the hold 1 area. The purpose is to prevent (suppress) this.

In the first embodiment, the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed) among the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a based on the generated logical sum data. Identify what the data corresponds to the high hold ball. More specifically, since the logical sum data indicates that the data corresponds to the reserved sphere, which has a higher expectation as it goes to the upper bits, is there an on (1) bit in the logical sum data? Whether or not it is determined from the high-order bit side, and when an on bit is detected, the continuous advance notice effect is executed from the value of the advance notice selection table 222b and the effect lottery counter 223f based on the variation type corresponding to the bit. Execute a lottery for approval or disapproval. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the hold area in which the bit corresponding to the same expectation (variation type) as the ON (1) bit of the OR data is ON (1) is searched. Then, a continuous advance notice effect that continues to the hold ball corresponding to the hold area in which the same bit as the OR data is turned on is set.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is used as the logical sum data. Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 as compared with the case of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed after confirming the details of the data of all the holding areas. can. More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out of length or out of short (that is, the lottery result that is not subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed), in the first embodiment, the logic Since all the bits of the sum data are 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method of determining each bit of all the holding areas one by one. Further, for example, even if there are a plurality of reserved balls to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, if the determination is made based on the OR data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the variation type having the highest expectation (priority for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed) in the hold. Therefore, it is not necessary to discriminate each bit of all the holding areas and to specify the fluctuation type having the highest expectation among the plurality of fluctuation types to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4208 in FIG. 33). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 36). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 32) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

The fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. The fluctuation time counter is set with a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation display, and is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, for example. Will be done. With this fluctuation time counter 223e, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed by the main control device 110 can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to match the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first display device 37 with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the third symbol display device 81.

The effect lottery counter 223f is a counter used for a lottery of an effect mode such as determination (lottery) of whether or not continuous advance notice effect can be executed. This production lottery counter 223f is. The value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When the continuous advance notice effect is drawn, the advance notice type corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is referred to from the advance notice selection table 222b, and the continuous advance notice effect is determined.

The game state storage area 223 g is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223g is updated every time a state command output is received from the main control device 110 every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4210 in FIG. 33). The game state storage area 223g is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the lowest bit is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and indicates whether or not the lower second bit is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223 g.

The advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, and if the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on, it means that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. On the other hand, if the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is not performed. While the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on, the determination (lottery) of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is prohibited. The advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to on when the determination (lottery) of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is won (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). Further, the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to off when the fluctuation of the normal (that is, without the advance notice effect) variation display executed for the first time after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is stopped (S4402 in FIG. 35). reference).

The notice number counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of times of the remaining fluctuation display of the continuous notice effect. When the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is set according to the number of times of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). Further, while the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time the timing for newly starting the variable display is reached (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

The advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variation display is being executed after the continuous advance notice effect is completed. That is, it is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation display in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released after the fluctuation is being executed. If this notice prohibition release flag 223j is on, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous notice effect is finished, and if it is off, it means that the first time after the continuous notice effect is finished. It means that the state is other than the execution of the variable display of. The notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to on at the start of the first variation display after the continuous notice effect is completed (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to off when the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The notice type flag 223k is a flag indicating the effect type of the continuous notice effect, and for example, a 3-bit storage area is allocated. The first bit corresponds to the advance notice effect A, the second bit corresponds to the advance notice effect B, and the third bit corresponds to the advance notice effect C, indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the on (1) bit is set. Further, when all the bits are off (0), it means that the continuous advance notice effect is not set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 16, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 16A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 16 (b). As shown in FIG. 16 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the image of the fluctuation when the power is turned on with the “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and “○” as shown in FIG. 16 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 16 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C alternate. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 17B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 17, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 17A to 17B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without the numbers "1" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19 in the example of FIG. In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 38) (see S6005 in FIG. 38). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 49 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 40B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 40 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 49 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 40 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 20) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 20, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 40 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 50). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 40 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 30. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball to the launch control device 112 when the launch of the game ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, when it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No) ends this process as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is reset to off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213) to set the start of the big hit. (S214), the process shifts to S217. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S215). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S216), and the process shifts to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the processing of S216 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol is set (S217), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability variation state of the special symbol (whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on) (S302). The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change. When the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

If it is determined that the special symbol is in the probabilistic state (probability change flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probabilistic state (probability change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol. , The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "0" is set as the random number value that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches "0", it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the processing of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit A). , Jackpot B), it is determined what kind of jackpot is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 9B), and "50". If it is in the range of "~ 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10). When the process of S307 is completed, the process shifts to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), the normal reach, Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach. When the process of S309 is completed, the process shifts to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 29). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the entry (winning) into the first entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered (winned) the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of pending numbers N of the variation display in the special symbol) is set. Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). Specifically, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0. If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second random number table for high probability time are used. Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 9C).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S509 or S510 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S511: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process shifts to S514. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S511: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S514), and if it is in the normal symbol time saving state (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is set to 3 seconds (S515) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process is performed. To finish. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, so it is normal. The lottery frequency of symbols increases. Therefore, as the frequency of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols increases, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64a becomes easier to open, so that the game ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S517 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S517, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S518, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S519). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the time saving state (S520), and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. (S520: Yes) sets "1 second x 2 times" as the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 (S522), and shifts to the processing of S523. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entry port 64. , "0.2 seconds x 1 time" is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the electric accessory 64a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or the process of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d ( If M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), it is normal. The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S814 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S814 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of FIG. 29, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S814). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S815, S816) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S815, S816) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the values of the probability change flag 203e and the time reduction / medium counter 203f are read (S811)), and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game state indicated by each read value is set (S812). The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the data in the game state storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the game state indicated by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can be made to grasp the accurate gaming state immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing of S812 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later. The state command is composed of, for example, 1 byte of data, and the gaming state can be notified by the data of the lower 2 bits. That is, the lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not the time saving state is set, and if the lowest bit is on, it indicates that the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the least significant bit is off, it indicates that the current state is the normal state of the normal symbol. Further, it is a bit indicating whether or not the data of the lower 2nd bit is in the probabilistic state, and if the lower 2nd bit is on, it indicates that the present is the probabilistic state of the special symbol. On the other hand, when the lower 2nd bit is off, it indicates that the current state is a low probability state of the special symbol. By discriminating the on / off of each bit of this state command, the game state can be easily identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) after ending the variable display. Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 27 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 28). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 29). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S214 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the game ball is predetermined. When a number (for example, 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If this is the case (S1011: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1011 when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012).

In the processing of S1012, when it is determined that the jackpot is not A (that is, the jackpot is B) (S1012: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f, so that 100 times of normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The time saving period is set to be given (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. On the other hand, in the processing of S1012, when it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on so that the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. Is set to (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1013 or the processing of S1015 executed after the processing of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol (whether it is the probability variation state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol) after the jackpot is completed is voiced. A status command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 31, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 32) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

In the processing of S4002, if the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It was started after the execution of the power off processing of S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). It was started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data shifts to S4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 32). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the main The game state at power-on indicated by the state command output in the start-up process of the control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state is stored according to the game state notified by the state command. The data of the area 223 g is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S4009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then the main control device 110 The game state at power-on indicated by the state command output in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state storage area 223 g is obtained according to the game state notified by the state command. The data is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 this time was executed (S4101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S4102 to S4110 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111, and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by each process of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is set. That is, it is a process for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and the process shifts to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4111, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, when the command determination process is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S4201). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S4201: Yes). S4203), the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4207). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). Further, in the process of S4208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S4208 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64, or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the start is started. Every time a prize is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S4208 to the number of special symbol reserved balls of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4208 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data of the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4210), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received winning command is analyzed and the winning information command processing for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is executed (S4212). , Return to the main process. Details of this winning information command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

On the other hand, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S4213). Then, when it is determined that the stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, and if it is the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state, all the reserved states are held. Based on the lottery result of the reserved ball, the stop command process for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed (S4214). Details of this stop command processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When the process of S4214 is completed, the stop display of the changing third symbol is set (S4215), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if the stop command is not received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S4216). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is an opening command, the display control device 114 is instructed to start the jackpot opening effect by setting the display opening command to the display control device 114. Further, for example, if the other command is an ending command, the display control device 114 is instructed to start the jackpot ending effect by setting the display ending command to the display control device 114.

By executing this command determination process, it is possible to execute an appropriate process according to the command output from the main control unit 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the above-mentioned winning information command processing (S4212) will be described. As described above, the winning information command processing (S4212) is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received winning information command is sent to the holding area with the youngest number among the vacant areas of the holding first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read out (S4302), and it is determined whether or not the read counter value is 2 or more (S4303).

When it is determined by the processing of S4303 that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S4303: No), the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous advance notice effect (2 or more) is not reached. Since this means that, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4303: Yes). S4304). If it is determined in the process of S4304 that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the advance notice lottery is currently prohibited, and the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed (execution lottery) is prohibited. Since it is in the state of being in the state, the process of S4305 to S4311 for performing the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4305), and the read notice selection table 222b is read. Among them, by comparing the random number value (counter value) specified according to the variation type notified by the winning information command this time with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. (S4306). That is, it is determined whether or not any one of the range of random numbers defined in association with each of the advance notice effects A to C matches the value of the effect lottery counter 223f.

Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the process of S4306 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4307), and in the case of the determination result corresponding to the non-execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4307: No). , Ends this process as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4307: Yes), first, the effect type of the current continuous advance notice effect specified from the advance notice selection table 222b is selected. The notice type flag 223k is updated accordingly (S4308). That is, if the effect type this time is the advance notice effect A, the first bit of the advance notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), the other bits are set to off (0), and if it is the advance notice effect B, the advance notice type flag. If the second bit of 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if the notice effect C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is turned on (1) and the other bits are turned off (1). Set to 0).

When the processing of S4308 is completed, next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4309), and the read counter value is set in the advance notice number counter 223i (S4310). As a result, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the variable display based on all the reserved balls currently held. When the process of S4310 is completed, the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is set to be turned on to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state (S4311), and this process is terminated.

By executing this winning information command processing (see FIG. 34), the variation display based on the reserved ball held at the time of receiving the current winning information command and the variation display based on the winning information command are executed. It is possible to set a continuous advance notice effect to be performed. As described above, the decision rate of the continuous advance notice production is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the lottery result notified by the winning information command is out of order. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit.

Next, the details of the stop command processing (S4214) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 35. As described above, this stop command process (S4214) determines whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, and if it is the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the lottery result of all the reserved balls held Based on this, it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the stop command process (see FIG. 35) is executed, it is determined whether the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (S4401), and if it is determined to be off (S4401: No). ) Since it means that it is not the timing to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (that is, it is the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is used to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibition state. Is set to off, and the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to off (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4404).

In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or less (S4404: No), the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous advance notice effect is not enough. This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), the number of reserved balls required to execute the continuous advance notice effect is greater than or equal to the number of reserved balls. Since it means that the ball is on hold, each process of S4405 to S4415 for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each hold ball.

More specifically, first, among the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the data of the upper 6 bits in each area excluding the reserved first area is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum is 1 (on) (S4406), and if it is on (S4406: Yes), the variation type of the on bit (that is, per special reach) is set. Each process of S4409 to S4415 for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed at a corresponding ratio.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4406, when it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is not 1 (that is, 0) (S4406: No), then the bit lower by 1 bit than the bit determined this time is It is determined whether it is 1 (on) (S4407). In the processing of S4407, when it is determined that the bit lower by one bit is not 1 (that is, 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the lowest bit in the OR data. Determine (S4408).

In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that the target bit for which the determination is performed this time is not the lowest bit in the OR data (S4408: No), the processing is shifted to S4407, and thereafter, the processing of S4407 is performed. It is determined that 1 (on) bits are detected by discrimination (S4407: Yes), or that not all bits up to the lowest bit are 1 (on) (that is, 0) in the processing of S4408 (S4408). ), Each process of S4407 and S4408 is repeatedly executed.

When a 1 (on) bit is detected in the process of S4407 (S4407: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at a ratio according to the variation type to which the 1 (on) bit is associated. Each process of S4409 to S4415 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4408, when it is determined that not all the bits up to the lowest bit are 1 (on) (that is, 0) (S4408: No), the balls are continuously held in the currently held balls. Since it means that the lottery result that is the target of the determination of whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed is not included, this process is terminated as it is.

When 1 (on) bit is detected from the OR data in the processing of S4406 or S4407 (S4406: Yes or S4407: Yes), first, the advance notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is displayed. Read (S4409). Next, with reference to the read advance notice selection table 222b based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (on) in the processing of S4406 or S4407 and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (whether the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random value specified in the advance notice selection table 222b) (S4410).

When the processing of S4410 was completed, the determination by the processing of S4410 then resulted in a determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random value specified in the advance notice selection table 222b). (S4411), and if it is a determination result that does not correspond to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4411: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4411 that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4411: Yes), first, according to the effect type of the current continuous advance notice effect specified from the advance notice selection table 222b. The notice type flag 223k is updated (S4412). That is, if the effect type this time is the advance notice effect A, the first bit of the advance notice type flag 223k is set to on (1), the other bits are set to off (0), and if it is the advance notice effect B, the advance notice type flag. If the second bit of 223k is set to on (1) and the other bits are set to off (0), and if the notice effect C, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is turned on (1) and the other bits are turned off (1). Set to 0).

When the processing of S4412 is completed, the holding area in which the bit corresponding to the variation type to be determined this time is set to 1 (on) is searched in order from the holding fourth area side (). S4413), the value corresponding to the searched hold area is set in the advance notice number counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is the reserved fourth area, the advance notice number counter 223i is set to 4, and for example, if the search result is the hold second area, the advance notice number counter 223i is set to 2.

The reason for searching from the hold 4th area side is to set a continuous notice effect over a larger number of hold balls when there are a plurality of hold areas in which the bit to be searched in S4413 is 1 (on). be. Specifically, for example, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined by the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of the super reach out, and the hold 4 area and the hold 2 area are out of super reach. When the data corresponding to is stored, the out-of-super reach of the reserved fourth area can be detected first by searching from the reserved fourth area side. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect over the four variable displays. On the other hand, if the search is performed from the hold 1st area, the search ends when the data out of the super reach of the hold 2 area is detected. Will be reduced (it will be a variable display for 2 times based on the data stored in the 1st and 2nd areas on hold). Therefore, by performing a search from the hold 4th area side, it is possible to set a continuous advance notice effect over more variable displays, so that the player's expectation can be continuously held for a longer period of time. be able to.

When the process of S4414 is completed, the notice lottery prohibition state is set by turning on the notice effect prohibition flag 223h (S4415), and this process is finished.

By this stop command processing, at the timing when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the holding areas other than the first holding area in the winning information storage area 223a, and the logic concerned. It is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the sum data. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 as compared with the case of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed after confirming the details of the data of all the holding areas. can. More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out of length or out of short (that is, the lottery result that is not subject to the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed), in the first embodiment, the logic Since all the bits of the sum data are 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method of determining each bit of all the holding areas one by one. Further, for example, even if there are a plurality of reserved balls to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, if the determination is made based on the OR data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the variation type having the highest expectation (priority for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed) in the hold. Therefore, among the plurality of variation types for which each bit of all the holding areas is discriminated and the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is possible, the change having the highest degree of expectation (priority for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed) is the highest. There is no need to perform processing such as specifying the type. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, the search of the hold area in which the bit corresponding to the variation type to be determined of the continuous notice effect is on is executed in order from the hold fourth area. Although it was composed, it is not limited to this. For example, the search may be performed in order from the reserved first area. With this configuration, when there are a plurality of holding balls of variable types to be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect specified based on the OR data, the continuous notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the variable type having the same expectation from being executed multiple times during the process. That is, for example, when data corresponding to the fluctuation type out of super reach is stored in the hold 2nd area and the hold 4th area, when the hold area is searched from the hold 4 area side, the hold 4th area is searched. The continuous notice effect will be executed up to the variable display corresponding to the area data. In this case, in one continuous advance notice production, the super reach deviation (variation display with high expectation) occurs twice (multiple times). If the fluctuation display with high expectation occurs in quick succession, and the expectation for the big hit is further increased by executing the continuous notice effect during that time, the game is finally missed. There is a possibility that the motivation for the game of the person is greatly reduced. On the other hand, if the hold area is searched from the hold first area side, the number of times the change display of the highly expected change type is executed in one continuous notice effect can be limited to the minimum. , It is possible to make it difficult to lower the motivation of the player for the game even if the continuous notice production is missed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4507 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33). Acquire the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command (S4503).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if it is set, the advance notice effect setting process for setting the advance notice effect is executed (S4504). .. Details of this advance notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the processing of S4504 is completed, then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of variation display determined in the processing of S4504 is generated, and the command is sent to the display control device. Set to transmit to 114 (S4505). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4507). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4507: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508), and then in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4509).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device 114 is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notification is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4510), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. This advance notice effect setting process (S4504) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36), and as described above, the continuous advance notice effect is added to the variation display started based on the current variation pattern command. It is a process for determining whether or not it is set, and if it is set, for setting a notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601), and if the value is greater than 0, it is determined. (S4601: Yes), since it means that the continuous notice effect is set for the variation display this time, the notice type flag 223k is read out (S4602). Next, the variation pattern accompanied by the advance notice effect of the mode indicated by the advance notice type flag 223k is determined with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4603), the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and this processing is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is 0 in the processing of S4601 (S4601: No), first, the variation pattern of the mode not accompanied by the advance notice effect is referred to the variation pattern selection table 222a. It is determined (S4605), and then it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606). If it is determined in the process of S4606 that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the first variation display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, so the advance notice is prohibited. The release flag 223j is set to ON (S4607), and this process ends. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4607, the notice lottery prohibition state is continued during the change period of the change display (the first change display after the end of the continuous notice effect) that starts this time. At the end of the fluctuation, the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be canceled in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) (see S4402 in FIG. 35). By configuring the advance notice lottery prohibition state to continue until the first variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from being executed again at no interval after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. can.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 51. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 38) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 39, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 49 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, small hit, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of order). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (a). FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to F, small hit, reach out, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 43A. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). .. Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and the other bits are set to on. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. ..

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 42 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 46 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite, Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to produce the definite display effect. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 40B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of executing a continuous advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect of the same system is executed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays. Whether or not this continuous advance notice effect can be executed is basically determined when a new start winning prize for the first entry port 64 is detected. When it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time when the new start prize is detected and the variable display based on the new start prize. This continuous advance notice effect is determined more frequently in the case of a big hit than in the case where the lottery result of the new start prize is missed. You can have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the advance notice lottery prohibition state for prohibiting the lottery of the continuous advance notice effect is set. This is to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being determined in duplicate during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. More specifically, if the configuration is such that whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined based on the detection of a new start prize even during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the type of the advance notice effect is changed in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. There is a possibility of switching. For example, if a new start prize is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect in which the advance notice effect B is set to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and the execution of the advance notice effect A is decided, the advance notice effect B is determined. Is cut off, and there is a risk that the next fluctuation will switch to the advance notice production A. That is, switching from a production type with a relatively high expectation (notice production B) to a production type with a low expectation (notice production A) may disappoint the player. In addition, when a continuous advance notice effect of the same effect type is newly determined during execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed over a number of variable displays equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls held at the start of the continuous advance notice effect. The notice production will be executed. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand which holding ball should have a sense of expectation, so that the meaning of the production may be difficult to understand. In addition, as a method of solving these problems, it is allowed to judge whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed only when the start winning prize corresponding to the big hit is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect that is finally out of order. In addition, it is also conceivable to configure the effect type of the continuous notice effect additionally determined to be higher than the effect type of the continuous notice effect being executed. However, in this case, every time a start prize is detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions and perform control processing for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the advance notice type. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, a new continuous advance notice effect is executed from the time when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined to the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of one variable display. The configuration is such that it is prohibited to judge whether or not it is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the production type from being switched during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, or to prevent the continuous advance notice effect from continuing beyond the number of reserved balls at the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Can be done. Further, at the time of starting winning, it is sufficient to perform a simple control of determining whether or not the advance notice lottery is prohibited, and skipping the process of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed if the advance notice lottery is prohibited. The processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is lifted, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and based on the determination result, the continuous advance notice effect is produced. It is configured to judge whether or not it can be executed. The details of the determination method will be described later, but by determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by taking into account the lottery results of all the reserved balls, the reserved balls with higher expectations are reserved. It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, even though the continuous notice effect is set for the hold ball with low expectation, the continuous notice effect is not set for the hold ball with high expectation, or the hold with high expectation in the middle of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are digested and the reserved balls with low expectations are digested at the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is continued after the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of one normal (not set of advance notice effect) variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to execute at least one normal variable display from the end of the continuous advance notice effect to the start of the next continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being started again immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect from continuing endlessly. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand which reserved ball should be expected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is generated based on the logical sum data. The configuration was such that the feasibility of executing the continuous advance notice effect was determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a winning information command is received, the OR data may be generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the logical sum data when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled. Therefore, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. The processing load required for discrimination can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided, the continuous notice effect is executed over all the reserved balls held at the time of the decision, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the range of the reserved balls for which the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed may be further determined according to the lottery result or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a continuous advance notice effect in which the deviation is finally notified, the number of consecutive notice effects is set to 3 or less, while the continuous notification of the final hit is notified. In the case of the advance notice effect, the number of consecutive advance notice effects may be up to 4 times. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive times of the advance notice effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect is set for all the reserved balls held at the time of the decision, and then the continuous advance notice effect ends. It was configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state. That is, once the number of consecutive notice effects in the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of consecutive times is not increased or decreased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, if a new winning information command is received during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the execution lottery for the continuous advance notice effect may be performed. That is, a lottery (continuous notice extension lottery) may be executed as to whether or not the continuous notice effect is extended to the variable display corresponding to the new winning information. In this case, the continuous advance notice extension lottery may be performed only in the case of the continuous notice effect in which the continuous notice effect being executed finally notifies the deviation. With this configuration, the continuous advance notice effect can be continuously executed over a larger number of times, so that the player's interest can be improved. In addition, the extension of the continuous advance notice production may be decided only when a new start prize is won. With this configuration, if the continuous notice effect exceeds the upper limit of 4 reserved balls, in addition to winning the continuous notice extension lottery for the player, it will be a big hit. Can also be understood. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the number of consecutive times of the advance notice effect during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect to perform the game.

In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each holding area is calculated and used for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, but the configuration is not limited to 6 bits, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 and the like. It may be set arbitrarily according to. In addition, the lottery probability (judgment ratio) of the continuous advance notice effect corresponding to each lottery result may be arbitrarily determined.

In the first embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the number of reserved balls is one, a lottery may be made to determine whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, the fluctuation display of the third symbol accompanied by the advance notice effect is performed in a single shot within the fluctuation time of 1 (that is, the fluctuation time of the first symbol and the fluctuation time of the third symbol are matched). It is good, the fluctuation display of the third symbol accompanied by the advance notice effect is executed multiple times within the fluctuation time of 1 (that is, the fluctuation display of the third symbol having a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time of the first symbol is executed multiple times. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment, as a continuous advance notice effect, three identical third symbols are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol is displayed when the three third symbols are stopped and displayed. Although the notice effect of displaying in a burning mode has been described, the mode of the notice effect is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the same (or similar mode) effect may be generated at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) in each fluctuation, or at a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuation is stopped). ) May have the same (or similar) characters appearing. In addition, a series of story-like productions (for example, a production in which a big hit is notified by fighting and winning an enemy, a production in which a big hit is notified if the enemy can escape, etc.) are set as a continuous advance notice production. It may be configured to be executed over all the variable displays. Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is set, it is not always necessary to execute the advance notice effect of the same system in all the variable displays within the set range. For example, when the advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice effect is determined. The mode of the hold symbol indicating the hold ball corresponding to the above may be changed to a mode different from the usual one until the end of the fluctuation (for example, the color of the hold symbol may be changed, the hold symbol may be changed to a predetermined character, etc.). .. With this configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the reserved sphere before the variable display based on the reserved sphere corresponding to the reserved symbol whose mode has been changed is started.

In the first embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is set, the main symbols with the same numbers displayed in each symbol row are different from the other third symbols (wearing an aura). Although it is configured to be displayed in the mode), an effect of changing to a different mode may be executed even when the continuous advance notice effect is not being executed. Specifically, for example, only when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol of 1 is displayed in the same mode as the advance notice effect, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changed in mode. An effect may be performed in which the main symbol with the same number as the symbol is not stopped and displayed. Further, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in the same manner as the advance notice effect, and when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the mode is changed. An effect may be performed in which the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol is not stopped and displayed. That is, it may be configured to execute an effect (so-called fake effect) in which the effect mode is the same as that in the case where the advance notice effect is set up to the middle, and the effect mode is different from the advance notice effect in the middle. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous advance notice effect has been started until the effect mode is different from that of the advance notice effect. Therefore, the lottery for executing the continuous advance notice effect is won for a long period of time. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the continuous advance notice production.

In the first embodiment, the ratio of the continuous advance notice effect to be determined according to the variation type and the ratio of each type of advance notice effect are variable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the variable type, the ratio of the continuous advance notice effect being determined according to the jackpot type and the ratio of each type of advance notice effect may be changed. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot in the case of a big hit according to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed and the type of the advance notice effect, so that the player's interest in the continuous advance notice effect can be further enhanced. Can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in the state where the notice lottery prohibition state is not (the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on) and the prize information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, a notice is always given. In the selection table 222b, the possibility of executing the continuous advance notice effect is determined (lottery) by referring to the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the variation type this time, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, if a reserved ball (with a lottery result that is advantageous to the player) having a higher expectation than the starting prize this time is already held, the continuous advance notice effect may not be drawn. If the continuous notice effect is decided while the hold ball with higher expectation than this start prize is already held, after the variable display with high expectation is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect. , In the final variation display of the continuous notice effect, a situation occurs in which the variation display with a relatively low expectation is executed. In other words, there is a risk that the degree of expectation will be the production of a dent. On the other hand, when a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is already held, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the degree of expectation from becoming a dent by adopting a configuration in which the lottery itself for the continuous notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the variable display executed at the end of the continuous advance notice production can give a great sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled when the change is completed once after the continuous advance notice effect is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be canceled when the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect is completed.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning prize is detected in a state where the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed without limitation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is already included in the hold, it may be configured to avoid the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous advance notice production from being interrupted due to a big hit in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, for example, when the lottery result of the big hit is held in the hold first area, it may be configured to avoid the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. With this configuration, even if a jackpot already exists in the hold when a new start prize is detected, fluctuations accompanied by at least two notice effects before the jackpot is notified. The display can be performed. That is, it is possible to suppress that the variable display accompanied by the advance notice effect is executed only once and the big hit is notified. Therefore, since the player can be made to think that the continuous advance notice effect is executed to notify the jackpot, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural. In this case, the setting of the continuous notice effect is reset when the jackpot is reached, and at the timing when the jackpot ends, whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball is held. It may be configured to make a determination.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59. In the first embodiment described above, each time a start winning is detected, the lottery result (win / fail, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of a special symbol is pre-read from various counter values (random values) acquired based on the starting winning. The pre-reading result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect based on the pre-reading result notified by the winning information command. Further, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being determined in duplicate. .. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the release is calculated, and the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. That is, based on the OR data, whether or not the reserved sphere includes a reserved sphere of a variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and the most expected variation among the current reserved spheres It was configured to determine what the type was. Then, when a variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is included, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined by the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation (lottery probability). It was configured to be drawn).

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the variation type so that the total value of points corresponding to one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. .. Then, during the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the points are held based on the total value of the points. The configuration is such that the variable type included in the sphere is grasped and whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined.

Further, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning prize in the main control device 110, the range of the values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The value range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of acquired values without performing pre-reading. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range of the random number values (counter values) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 in place of the winning information command. , The pre-reading is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device. The configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and it is executed by MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing to be performed has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52A is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the ROM 202 of the second embodiment has a random number range selection table 202e added in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9 (a)). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random number range selection table 202e is a data table referred to for specifying a range of values to which various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the starting winning prize for the first ball opening 64 belong. At the time of starting winning, various counter values are compared with the random number range selection table 202e, and the range of values to which the counter values (random number values) belong is specified (see S412 in FIG. 55). The value range of the specified counter value (random number value) is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

The details of the random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (b) and 52 (c). FIG. 52B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the random number range selection table 202e sets the range of the values of the first hit random number counter C1 and the hit random number range table 202e1 for specifying the value range of the first hit type counter C2. It is composed of at least a hit type range table 202e2 for specifying and a variation type range table 202e3 for specifying a range of values of the variation type counter CS1.

With reference to FIG. 52 (c), among the tables constituting the random number range selection table 202e, the hit random number range table 202e1 will be taken as an example to explain the outline of the defined contents of each table constituting the random number range selection table 202e. ..

As shown in FIG. 52 (c), in the hit random number range table 202e1, the data (range parameter) indicating the range of the random number value (counter value) and the value range of the first random number counter C1 are associated with each other. It is stipulated. More specifically, the range parameter "00H" is defined in association with the value "0" of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the big hit random number in the low probability state and the probability variation state of the special symbol). , The range parameter "01H" is defined in association with the range "1 to 9" of the value of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the jackpot random number in the probability variation state of the special symbol), and the first random number counter. The range parameter "02H" is defined in association with the range "10 to 49" of the value of C1, and the range parameter "50 to 99" is defined for the range "50 to 99" of the value of the random number counter C1 per first. "03H" is associated with each other, and the range parameter "04H" is associated with the range "100 to 149" of the value of the random number counter C1 per first. After that, the values of different range parameters are defined in association with each 50 range of random value values.

With reference to the winning random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize is "60", the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is " Since it is "50 to 99", "03H" is specified as a range parameter indicating the range of the random number value this time. Further, for example, if the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is "375", the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is "350 to 399", so that the range of the random number value this time is As a range parameter indicating, "09H" is specified.

In each range, only the determination values corresponding to the same determination result are defined. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "00H", only the determination value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameter "01H", only the determination value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameters "02H" to "09H", only the determination value determined to be out of alignment is defined. In this way, by configuring each range with only the same type of determination values, it is possible to make a one-to-one correspondence between each range and the determination result. That is, the judgment values corresponding to a plurality of judgment results are mixed in the range of 1, and even if the range is specified, the judgment result using the counter value (random value) in the range cannot be specified. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the pre-reading process can be accurately executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the range parameter specified and notified with reference to the hit random number range table 202e1.

Although not shown, the other tables (hit type range table 202e2, variable type range table 202e3) constituting the random number range selection table 202e are also similarly the first hit type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS1. The range of values of and the value of the range parameter are defined in association with each other. Further, the plurality of ranges set in each table are all composed of only the determination values corresponding to the same determination result.

As described above, the range parameters specified by referring to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e such as the hit random number range table 202e1 are output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the random number range command. .. The voice lamp control device 113 pre-reads various lottery results (lottery result of special symbol, jackpot type, fluctuation pattern) based on the range of values to which various counter values (random number values) notified by the random number range command belong. Although details will be described later, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 defines a range of various counter values (random number values) that can be notified by a random number range command and lottery results based on the various counter values in association with each other. A data table is provided. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, the voice lamp control device 113 pre-reads the lottery result for each type of counter based on each data table.

In this way, the range to which the values of the various counter values (random values) acquired based on the start winning prize belong is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the various counter values (various counter values) received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. The processing load on the main control device 110 side can be reduced by configuring the look-ahead to be executed based on the data table that defines the correspondence between the range to which the value of (random value) belongs and the lottery result. That is, when a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 needs to execute a process of pre-reading the lottery result by comparing each random number value defined in various data tables with the counter value acquired this time. Instead, it is only necessary to compare the range of values specified in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time. Therefore, in the main control device 110 that performs the main control related to the game such as the lottery of the big hit and the update of the display mode of the first symbol, the main control related to the game is surely executed without delay by reducing the processing load. can do. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random number value) itself acquired based on the starting prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value (random number value) is converted into a range of values to which the counter value (random number value) belongs and the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is configured to output to, even if the random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, the random number value (value of the random number counter C1 per first) that becomes a big hit from the illegally acquired random number range command is output. It can be difficult to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be enhanced. Further, since the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead processing corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random value), the main control device 110 can perform the special symbol fluctuation start processing. Look-ahead can be executed under conditions closer to the various lottery executed in (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the look-ahead result.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. First, FIG. 53A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a point selection table 222c and a subordinate random number table with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12 (a)). At least 222d, a subordinate type table 222e, a subordinate variation type table 222f, and a selection table 222g for cancellation are added.

The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to for specifying points according to the variation type specified by look-ahead. During the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the point selection table 222c is referred to and the total value of points is updated every time the variation type is specified by the look-ahead.

The details of the point selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the point selection table 222c, points are associated and defined for each variation type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), for the fluctuation type "per special reach", "30 points" are defined in association with each other (see 222c1 in FIG. 54 (a)), and the fluctuation For the types "per super reach" and "per normal reach", "5 points" are defined in association with each other (see 222c2 and 222c3 in FIG. 54 (a)), "out of special reach", and "super reach". “1 point” is defined in association with “off” and “normal reach out” (see 222c4 to 222c6 in FIG. 54 (a)). On the other hand, for other fluctuation types (“long deviation”, “short deviation”), “0 points” are defined in association with each other (see 222c7 in FIG. 54 (a)).

In the second embodiment, when the variation type is specified by look-ahead based on the random number range command in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the point selection table 222c is referred to, and the point corresponding to the current look-ahead result is specified. The specified points are added to the point storage area 223 m, which will be described later. As a result, in the state where the advance notice lottery is prohibited, the points corresponding to all the reserved balls can be updated at the same time as the look-ahead.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 53 (a). The subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f are the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter output from the main controller 110 by the random number range command, respectively. It is a data table referred to for pre-reading the hit / fail, jackpot type, and fluctuation pattern of a special symbol based on the range of values to which each of CS1 belongs. The configuration of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b), taking the subordinate random number table 222d as an example.

FIG. 54B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the subordinate random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the parameter table 222d, the range (range) of the random number value determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol for each game state (low probability state and high probability state of the special symbol). Parameters) are specified in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), "00H" is defined in association with the range (range parameter) of the random number value determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol (FIG. 54 (b). (Refer to 222d1 in b)), “00H, 01H” is defined in association with the range (range parameter) of the random number value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol (222d2 in FIG. 54 (b)). reference).

Although not shown, the values of the range parameters corresponding to the first hit type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS1 are similarly obtained for the other data tables (subordinate type table 222e, subordinate variation type table 222f). And the determined jackpot type or fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Upon receiving the random number range command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts and extracts the range parameters corresponding to each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 notified by the command. The value of each range parameter is compared with the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f, and the lottery result of the special symbol, the jackpot type, and the pre-reading of the variation pattern are executed. Since the look-ahead processing corresponding to various counters can be executed based on the range of the notified counter values (random values), it is executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 23) in the main controller 110. Look-ahead can be executed under conditions closer to the various lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the look-ahead result. When the pre-reading process is completed, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the advance notice lottery prohibition state, instead of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, the points according to the fluctuation type specified by the look-ahead are specified by referring to the point selection table, and the data of the point storage area 223 m. Performs the process of updating.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 53 (a). The release selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when the lottery for the continuous advance notice effect is performed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, continuous advance notice is made by comparing the average value of points stored in the point storage area 223 m divided by the number of reserved balls with the selection table 222g for cancellation. Judge whether the effect can be executed.

Here, the details of the selection table 222g for cancellation will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (c). FIG. 54 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the selection table 222g for release. As shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the release selection table 222g, the effect lottery counter 223f in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined for each range of the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223 m. The range of values for is specified respectively.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the average value (A) of the points is larger than 5, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A is set to "0". ~ 19 ”are associated and defined, and“ 20 to 49 ”are defined in association with each other as the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect B, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect C As the range of, "50 to 59" is defined in association with each other (see 222g1 in FIG. 54 (c)).

Further, when the average value (A) of the points is 5 or less and is larger than 1, "0 to 4" is associated with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A. "5 to 19" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect B, and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect C is "20 to 19". 29 ”is specified in association with each other (see 222g2 in FIG. 54 (c)). Further, when the average value (A) of the points is 1 or less, "0 to 8" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the advance notice effect A, and the advance notice effect B As the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the above, “9” is defined in association with the value (see 222g3 in FIG. 54 (c)). With this release selection table 222g, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to draw (determine) whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed with a lottery probability (determination ratio) according to the average value of points.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). The RAM 223 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12B) in that a point storage area 223m is added. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The point storage area 223m is a storage area for storing and updating the total value of points corresponding to the fluctuation type of each reserved ball during the advance notice lottery prohibition state. In this point storage area 223m, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the total value of the values obtained by converting the variation types corresponding to all the reserved balls into points is stored (FIG. 57). See S4713). The points stored in the point storage area 223m receive a random number range command based on a new start winning prize, and each time the look-ahead process is executed based on the range of the random number value (counter value) notified by the command. , Points corresponding to the variation type specified by look-ahead are added and updated (see S4705 in FIG. 57). Further, when a new variation display is started during the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the points corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started are subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. The start winning process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the start winning process (see FIG. 24). This is a process executed in association with the winning of 64 (starting winning).

Of the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, each process of S401 to S406 is the same as each process of S401 to S406 of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the process of S406 is completed, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52 (b)) is next read (S411) and read. By comparing the random number range selection table 202e and the acquired various counter values (random number values), the range (range parameter) of the value to which each counter value (random number value) belongs is specified (S412). Next, a random number range command for notifying the range (range parameter) of the value to which the specified counter value (random number value) belongs is set (S413), and this process is terminated.

The random number range command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, it extracts the range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random number values) from the random number range command, and the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate type table 222d of the ROM 222. By comparing with the variable type table 222f, the lottery result based on the current start winning prize is pre-read.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59. First, the command determination process 2 (S4211) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110 and executing the corresponding control.

Of the command determination processes 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216, S4201 to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the state command has not been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: No), then whether the random number range command has been received? When it is determined (S4221) and it is determined that the random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), pre-reading is performed based on the range (range parameter) of the value to which various counter values belong, which is notified by the random number range command. Random number range command processing of (S4222) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of this random number range command processing (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the random number range command process has not been received in the process of S4221 (S4221: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4213. When it is determined that the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the stop command process 2 is executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. Then (S4223), the process shifts to S4215. The details of the stop command process 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the random number range command process (S4222) executed when the random number range command is received in the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. As described above, this random number range command process (S4222) is a process for performing look-ahead based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

In this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameters for each counter type notified by the random number range command are compared with the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f, respectively. (S4701). That is, the range parameter corresponding to the first random number counter C1 is the subordinate random number table 222d, the range parameter corresponding to the first per type counter C2 is the subordinate type table 222e, and the range parameter corresponding to the variable type counter CS1 is. The lottery result is pre-read by comparing with the parameter table 222f. Then, the pre-reading result obtained by the processing of S4701 is stored in the empty area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

Next, if it is determined whether the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703) and if it is determined that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703: Yes), the advance notice lottery is prohibited, so points are stored. The process for updating the points stored in the area 223m is executed. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read out (S4704). Then, the points corresponding to the read-ahead result obtained by the process of S4701 are read from the point selection table 222c, the read points are added to the value stored in the point storage area 223 m (S4705), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706). That is, it is determined whether or not the minimum number of reserved balls required for executing the continuous advance notice effect is reserved. If it is determined in the process of S4706 that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), it means that the number of reserved balls is less than the minimum number of reserved balls required for executing the continuous advance notice effect. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4706 that the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), it means that the minimum number of reserved balls necessary for executing the continuous advance notice effect is reserved. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the random number range command this time.

Specifically, first, the advance notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read out (S4707), and the variation type specified by the pre-reading this time is compared with the advance notice selection table 222b which reads out the value of the effect lottery counter 223f. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed (S4708). Next, in the determination of S4708, it is determined whether or not the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect (S4709), and if the continuous advance notice effect is not executed (S4709: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4709 that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the advance notice type flag 223k is updated according to the effect type of the advance notice effect specified from the advance notice selection table 222b (S4709: Yes). S4710). Next, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the advance notice number counter 223i (S4712). Next, by comparing the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the point selection table 222c, the variation type of each reserved ball is converted into points. (S4713). Then, the total value of the points is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and this process is terminated.

By this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), the look-ahead processing can be accurately executed based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

Next, the details of the stop command process 2 (S4223) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 58. As described above, the stop command process 2 (S4223) is a process executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment.

Of the stop command processes 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415, S4401 to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 is executed.

Further, in the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S4404 is completed, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are read (S4421), and the read points are 0. (S4422). In the process of S4422, when it is determined that the read point is 0 (S4422: Yes), the reserved spheres to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are included in the reserved spheres. Since it means that there is no such thing, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4422, when it is determined that the read value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4422: No), the holding ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Indicates that at least one is reserved, so first, the average value (A) obtained by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b) is calculated (A). S4423).

Next, by comparing the average value (A) calculated in the process of S4423 with the release selection table 222 g (see FIG. 54 (c)), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed (S4424). The process shifts to S4411.

Further, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the hold area in which the data corresponding to the hold ball of the expected degree corresponding to the range of the average value is stored is stored. , Searches in order from the reserved fourth area in the winning information storage area 223a (S4425), and shifts the processing to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, it means that at least one of the special reach out, the super reach out, and the normal reach out is included in the reserved ball. In order from the four areas, the holding area in which the data corresponding to the variation type corresponding to the deviation with reach is stored is searched.

Further, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4415 is completed, the points stored in the point storage area 223 m are reset to 0 (S4426), and this process is completed. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521). This advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) is a process executed in place of the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for determining whether a continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if it is set, for setting the advance notice effect.

Of the advance notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, each process of S4601 to S4607 includes each process of S4601 to S4607 of the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the advance notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 is completed, the point selection table 222c is then read (S4611), and this execution is executed from the read table. The point corresponding to the variation type of the variation display to be started is specified (S4612). Then, the point specified in the process of S4612 is updated by subtracting it from the value stored in the point storage area 223 m (S4613), and this process is terminated. By executing this advance notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223 m can always be maintained at the total value of the points of the reserved balls held.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, points are set according to the fluctuation type, and the total value of the points corresponding to one or more data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated. It was configured so that it could be grasped. Then, during the advance notice lottery prohibition state, the total points are updated every time a new winning information command is received, and when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the points are held based on the total value of the points. The configuration is such that the variable type included in the sphere is grasped and whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined. By configuring in this way, whether the reserved ball corresponding to the variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is held from the point value, the type of the variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and the like It can be easily identified. Further, in comparison with the case where the change type of all the reserved balls is discriminated one by one after the notice lottery prohibition state is released, and whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed is determined according to the discriminant result. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning prize in the main control device 110, the range of the values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The range parameter corresponding to the value range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is configured to determine only the range of acquired values without performing pre-reading. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the value of the range parameter notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 side reads ahead. It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, when a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 compares each random number value defined in various data tables with the counter value acquired this time and pre-reads the lottery result. Since it is not necessary to execute the process and it is only necessary to compare the range of values defined in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time, the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, in the main control device 110 that performs the main control related to the game such as the lottery of the big hit and the update of the display mode of the first symbol, it is possible to suppress the processing from becoming heavy, so that the main control related to the game is surely performed. It can be executed without delay. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random number value) itself acquired based on the starting prize to the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value (random number value) is converted into a range of values to which the counter value (random number value) belongs and the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is configured to output to, even if the random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, the random number value (value of the random number counter C1 per first) that becomes a big hit from the illegally acquired random number range command is output. It can be difficult to predict. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be enhanced. Further, since the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead processing corresponding to various counters based on the range of the notified counter value (random value), the main control device 110 can perform the special symbol fluctuation start processing. Look-ahead can be executed under conditions closer to the various lottery executed in (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the look-ahead result.

In the second embodiment, various counter values acquired when a new start prize is detected are converted into range parameters and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but this is not always the case. No need to convert to range parameters. For example, the number of values that can be taken by various counter values (random values) and the same number of conversion parameters are prepared so that each value that can be taken by various counter values and the value of the conversion parameter have a one-to-one correspondence. It may be configured to be set. Then, when various counter values are acquired based on the starting prize, the various counter values may be converted into the values of the conversion parameters and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided with various data tables that define the correspondence between the conversion parameters and the lottery results. With this configuration, the lottery result can be pre-read on the voice lamp control device 113 side under conditions closer to the various lottery executed on the main control device 110 side, so that the pre-reading can be executed more accurately. can.

In the second embodiment, the range of values to which the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the start winning is specified by the random number range selection table 202e is specified. The specified range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but the type of the counter subject to this control is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined.

In the second embodiment, the range to which the various counter values acquired based on the start winning prize belongs is specified, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the random number range command. However, information other than the range is transmitted. It may be configured to notify. For example, as a table to be compared with various counter values at the time of starting prize, a data table defined by associating a random number value and a lottery result is prepared for the counter value, and various counter values are prepared based on the starting winning. The lottery result corresponding to the above may be specified and output to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command. With this configuration, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated data table to be referred to in order to specify the lottery results of various counter values at the start winning, and the data table used to execute the lottery of special symbols at the start of fluctuation is shared. It may be the configuration used in.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the cancellation is calculated, and the calculated logical sum data. The configuration was such that the type of variation included in the reserved ball was determined based on. Then, based on the determined variation type, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, during the advance notice lottery prohibition state, among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls, the type of the lottery result (variable type) with the highest expectation and the lottery with the highest expectation. It is configured so that it is possible to memorize the holding area in which the holding ball corresponding to the result is held. This stored information is updated every time the prize information command notifies the look-ahead result based on the new start prize. That is, by comparing the type of lottery result (variable type) based on the new start prize with the type of lottery result with the highest expectation already memorized, the degree of expectation indicated by the new lottery result has already been obtained. If the lottery result with the highest expectation in memory is higher than the expected degree, the type of lottery result based on the new winning information and the position of the holding area where the new winning information is stored are overwritten. It has a structure.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60A, the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a high expectation type flag 223n and a high expectation degree in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12B). It differs from the position storage area 223p in that it is provided.

The high expectation type flag 223n is a flag indicating the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation among the lottery results (variation type) corresponding to each reserved ball. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is determined whether or not the variable type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is reserved based on the state of the high expectation type flag 223n ( See S4432 in FIG. 62). The correspondence between the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n and the expectation. As shown in FIG. 60B, the high expectation type flag 223n has a configuration in which five types of states of 00H to 04H can be set. As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the value "00H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "long deviation" and "short deviation", which are the fluctuation types with the lowest expectation, and is "01H". Corresponds to the variation type "normal reach deviation", which has the second lowest (fourth highest) expectation. Further, the value "02H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to "super reach out" which is the fluctuation type with the third lowest (third highest) expectation, and "03H" corresponds to the expectation. Corresponds to the second highest (fourth lowest) variation type, "special reach loss".

The value "04H" of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to the "various hits" (per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach) with the highest expectation. That is, in the third embodiment, when the lottery result is a big hit, the same expectation is set regardless of the fluctuation type. This is intended to prevent the continuous advance notice production from being interrupted due to a big hit in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect. In other words, if the configuration is such that the difference in expectation is given to the fluctuation type of the jackpot, the start prize corresponding to the jackpot of the fluctuation type with low expectation is generated first, and then the jackpot of the fluctuation type with high expectation is dealt with. When a start winning prize occurs, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p, which will be described later, may be updated based on the jackpot of the variable type having a high expectation. That is, when a plurality of reserved balls corresponding to the jackpot are held at the time when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the jackpot hold based on the start prize detected later in time determines whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. There is a possibility that it will be the target of judgment. In this case, if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect is executed up to the variable display of the jackpot based on the start prize detected later in time, so that the continuous advance notice effect is detected first in time. A notice effect is set even in the variable display of the jackpot based on the addition introduction prize. Therefore, since the jackpot is obtained after the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation is started earlier, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand as if the continuous advance notice effect was executed in order to notify the jackpot. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the variation type corresponding to the jackpot is configured so as not to make a difference in the degree of expectation, and a new start prize corresponding to the jackpot is detected in a state where the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot already exists. However, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p, which will be described later, are configured not to be updated based on the variation type corresponding to the new start winning prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a big hit occurs in the middle of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice effect is restarted after the big hit. Can be made to be understood by the player more clearly. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more understandable effect.

The high expectation type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). In addition, each time a prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the fluctuation type indicated by the prize information command and the most expected fluctuation in the hold indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n. If the expected degree of the variable type indicated by the winning information command is higher than the expected degree of the variable type indicated by the winning information command, the value of this high expected degree type flag 223n corresponds to the expected degree of the variable type newly notified by the winning information command. (See S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released and it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the hold area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

Although not shown here, in the third embodiment, the expected degrees of all the variable types that are big hits are set to be the same (“04H”), and the specified contents of the advance notice selection table 222b are also set. , The variable type that is a big hit is configured so that a common judgment value is referred to regardless of the variable type. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, when the variation type based on the new start winning is "per super reach", the determination value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is set as the present. In the third embodiment, it is configured to be used for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed in all the variation types corresponding to the jackpot.

In addition, when the variation type based on the newly detected start winning is the variation type of the jackpot, the determination value used for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is not limited to this. A determination value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for determination in the case of normal reach in the first embodiment may be used, or a range of determination values not specified in the advance notice selection table 222b in the first embodiment is used. It may be configured. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 60 (a). The high expectation position storage area 223p is located at the position of the hold area in which the most expected fluctuation type (that is, the fluctuation type of the expectation indicated by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n) is held among the reserved balls. A storage area for storing the corresponding data. Specifically, if the holding area in which the holding ball corresponding to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation is held is the holding first area, "01H" is stored for the high expectation position storage area 223p. In the case of the second reserved area, "02H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, and in the case of the third holding area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. If it is the reserved fourth area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. This high expectation position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect (that is, when the advance notice lottery is prohibited) (FIG. FIG. See S4326 of 61 and S4436 of FIG. 62). In addition, each time a prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the fluctuation type indicated by the prize information command and the most expected fluctuation in the hold indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n. If the expected degree of the variable type indicated by the prize information command is higher than the type, the value corresponding to the hold area in which the data corresponding to the prize information newly notified by the prize information command is stored is high. The expected degree position storage area 223p is overwritten (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled and it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed up to the variable display based on the data of the hold area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p. (See S4434 in FIG. 62).

As described above, in the third embodiment, the type (type) of the lottery result (variable type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the lottery result having the highest expectation among the reserved balls are stored in the advance notice lottery prohibited state. The reserved area is configured to be recognizable by the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. As a result, in the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect to be executed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the continuous advance notice effect is simply determined at the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n. It suffices to determine whether or not to execute the above, and it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as determining the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls one by one, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, since the holding area in which the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) having the highest expectation is stored can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. , The process for specifying the range of the reserved ball for executing the continuous advance notice effect can be realized by simpler control. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing load from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. First, the winning information command process 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61.

The winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed in place of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Similar to the above, this is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect.

Of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, each processing of S4301 to S4311 includes each processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4304: Yes), the high expectation type flag. 223n is read (S4321), and the expected degree indicated by the read high expectation type flag 223n is compared with the expected degree of the variable type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether the expectation degree corresponding to the variation type notified by the newly received winning information command is higher expectation degree (S4323), and the newly notified variation type is higher expectation degree. If it is determined to be (S4323: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n is updated to a value corresponding to the expectation degree of the variation type notified by the current prize information command (see FIG. 60B). (S4324).

After the processing of S4324, the value corresponding to the type of the holding area (any of the holding 1st to 4th areas) storing the data notified by the winning information command this time is overwritten in the high expectation position storage area 223p. (Store) and (S4325) to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4323, when it is determined that the expected degree of the newly notified variation type is equal to or less than the expected degree indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n (S4323: No), each processing of S4324 and S4325 is performed. Skip and end this process as it is.

Further, in the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, after the processing of S4310 is completed (that is, after the continuous notice effect is set), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation Both the degree position storage area 223p are reset to the initial values (S4326), and the process shifts to S4311.

By executing this prize information command process 3 (see FIG. 61), every time the prize information based on the new start prize is received in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, all the balls including the new reserved ball based on the prize information are received. It is possible to re-determine the type (type) of the lottery result (variable type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored holding area. Therefore, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the type (type) of the lottery result (variable type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored holding area are set as the high expectation type flag. It can be easily determined based on the value (state) of 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Therefore, since the processing load from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the completion of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect can be reduced, the setting process of the continuous advance notice effect can be executed more preferably.

Next, the details of the stop command process 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. The stop command process 3 (S4322) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is a stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), It is determined whether the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, and if it is the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls held. This is a process for determining.

Of the stop command processes 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, the processes S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are the stop command processes (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 is executed. Further, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4404 is completed, the high expectation type flag 223n is read (S4431), and the value of the read high expectation type flag 223n (see FIG. 62). It is determined whether or not the state) is “00H” (S4432). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold ball, which is the target for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, is included in the hold.

In the processing of S4432, if the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4432: Yes), the fluctuation type with the highest expectation in the hold is "long deviation" or "short deviation". Since it means that the hold ball that is the target of the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is not included in the hold, the present process is terminated as it is without executing the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4432, if it is determined that the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is not "00H" (S4432: No), then the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is ". When it is determined whether the value is "02H" or higher (S4433) and when it is determined to be "01H" (S4433: No), the reserved ball corresponding to the most promising variation type is stored in the reserved first area. This means that the advance notice effect cannot be executed over a plurality of variable displays, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4433, when it is determined that the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is "02H" or more (S4433: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Since it means that the variable type to be held is included in the hold and the variable type is held in the second reserved area or later, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Specifically, the notice selection table 222b is read (S4409), and the continuous notice effect is executed based on the read notice selection table 222b and the variation type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Whether or not it is possible is determined (lottery) (S4434), and the process shifts to S4411.

Further, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the value stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is set as the value of the advance notice number counter 223i (S4435). ), The high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p are both reset to the initial values "00H" (S4436), and the process shifts to S4415.

By executing this stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62), when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Whether or not it is possible can be easily determined. Further, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the range of the hold area for which the continuous advance notice effect is set can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the end of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the advance notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment will be described. The advance notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and the advance notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37). Similarly to FIG. 37), it is a process for determining whether a continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation display to be started based on the current variation pattern command, and if it is set, for setting the advance notice effect.

Of the advance notice effect setting processes 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, each process of S4601 to S4607 includes each process of S4601 to S4607 of the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 is completed (that is, in the case of the fluctuation start timing during the advance notice lottery prohibition state), the next is high. It is determined whether the state (value) of the expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621), and if it is a value other than "00H" (S4621: No), the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is set to 1. It is updated by subtraction (S4622), and this process is terminated. As a result, the start of a new fluctuation display is set, and as the data in each holding area is shifted, the position (holding area) in which the holding ball corresponding to the most expected fluctuation type is stored is set. The indicated data (data in the high expectation position storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, in the process of S4621, if it is determined that the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621: Yes), the process of S4622 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is. When the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H", the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) has never been executed in the current advance notice lottery prohibition state, or the winning information command processing 3 Since it means that the variation type corresponding to the new winning information has never been determined to have a higher expectation by the processing of S4323 (see FIG. 61), the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Is the initial value of "00H".

By executing this advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63), every time a new start of variable display is set in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is stored in the actual winning information. It can be updated by linking to the data in area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the type of the lottery result (variable type) with the highest expectation among all the lottery results based on the reserved balls and the type thereof while the advance notice lottery is prohibited. The holding area where the holding ball corresponding to the lottery result with high expectation is held can be grasped by the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. There is. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the type (type) of the lottery result (variable type) having the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored holding area are classified into the high expectation type. The determination is made based on the value (state) of the flag 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p.

With this configuration, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. can. That is, it is a simple process as compared with the case where the fluctuation type of each reserved ball is discriminated one by one from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the fluctuation type having the highest expectation is specified. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, the processing load of the MPU 221 when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled can be reduced. Further, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the range of the hold area for which the continuous advance notice effect is set can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. can. That is, the process of searching for the hold area in which the data corresponding to the fluctuation type for which the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is stored is omitted, and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is simply used. Since it can be replaced by a simple process of reading, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the range of the reserved ball that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the third embodiment, the lottery corresponding to the big hit is notified by the winning information command, and the lottery corresponding to the big hit is included in the reserved balls held at the time when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. When the result is reserved, the configuration is such that whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined by the same determination value regardless of the variation type corresponding to the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the first embodiment, the ratio at which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined according to the variation type may be different depending on the variation type.

In the third embodiment, it is continuous when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on two types of information, the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. It was configured to determine whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only one of them may be provided in the RAM 223, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed together with the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. With such a configuration, the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the winning information notified by the winning information command is stored in the empty area of the winning information storage area 223a, but the winning information storage area 223a may be deleted. In the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based only on the prize information notified by the prize information command, and in the notice lottery prohibited state, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based only on the data stored in the area 223p. By deleting the winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. In the first embodiment described above, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect from being determined in duplicate. .. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a at the time of the release is calculated, and the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the logical sum. It was configured to determine whether or not it was possible. That is, based on the OR data, whether or not the reserved sphere includes a reserved sphere of a variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and the most expected variation among the current reserved spheres. It was configured to determine what the type was. Then, when a variation type to be determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is included, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined by the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation (lottery probability). It was configured to be drawn).

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state not only when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided but also when a big hit occurs. Then, even at the end of the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is calculated, and the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot is finished, the continuous notice effect is not set for the hold ball with high expectation even though the continuous notice effect is set for the hold ball with low expectation, or the continuous notice effect is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is digested on the way and a reserved ball with a low degree of expectation is digested at the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Is. Regarding various electrical configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, the time course of the lottery (determination) state of the continuous advance notice effect after winning the jackpot in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot start timing (opening period start timing) is reached, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. As a result, during the jackpot, even if the starting prize is detected, the determination (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is not executed. In the example of FIG. 64, the case where two starting prizes (winning a and winning b) are detected during the jackpot is shown, but both when the winning a is detected and when the winning b is detected, a notice is given. Since the lottery prohibition state is set, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the advance notice lottery prohibition state continues even during the jackpot ending period, and when the ending period ends (that is, when the jackpot end timing comes), the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. NS. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the contents (variation type) of the reserved balls held during the jackpot (winning a and winning b) and the reserved balls already held at the time when the jackpot starts are changed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. That is, the logical sum of the data stored in each holding area of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated and the highest degree of expectation is obtained, as in the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state in the first embodiment described above is canceled. Identify the type of variation. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the lottery probability (determination ratio) according to the fluctuation type with high expectation.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low expectation even though it is reserved. If the configuration is such that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined every time the start winning is detected until the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided during the execution of the jackpot, the variation type with low expectation. After deciding to execute the continuous advance notice effect for the start prize of, there is a possibility that the start prize of the variable type with high expectation is detected. In this case, the continuous advance notice effect that starts from the fluctuation immediately after the jackpot ends continues to the variation type with low expectation, and the variation display with high expectation is executed immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. There is a risk that the reliability of the continuous advance notice production of the person will be reduced. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, since the notice lottery prohibition state is set during the big hit, the continuous notice effect is set for the reserved ball with low expectation immediately after the big hit is finished. In spite of this, the situation where the continuous notice effect is not set for the hold ball with high expectation, or the hold ball with high expectation is digested in the middle of the continuous notice effect, the expectation is low at the last fluctuation display of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the reserved ball is digested. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

Although not shown, if the continuous notice effect has already been set at the start timing of the jackpot, the setting of the continuous notice effect is temporarily cleared when setting the notice lottery prohibition state. It has a structure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from ending with the setting of the continuous notice effect before the start of the jackpot remaining, so it is more reliable between the reserved ball at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot. After taking into account all the fluctuation types of the increased reserved balls, it is possible to preferably determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed after the big hit.

In the fourth embodiment, when the start timing of the jackpot is reached, the setting of the continuous advance notice effect that has already been set before the start of the jackpot is cleared, but the setting of the continuous advance notice effect is set. The timing of clearing is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be configured to clear the setting of the continuous advance notice effect based on the detection of the first start winning prize in the jackpot. With this configuration, for example, when the start prize is not detected even once during the big hit, the setting of the continuous advance notice effect before the start of the big hit can be diverted as it is as the setting after the big hit. That is, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed for the same reserved ball as before the start of the jackpot. The processing load of the lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. First, the command determination process 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above, and is the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. In addition, it is a process for performing control according to a command received from the main control device 110.

Of the command determination processes 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are the command determination processes (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the state command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the game state is determined according to the game state indicated by the state command. A state command process for updating the data in the storage area 223 g is executed (S4231), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the prize information command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65). Instead of (see FIG. 34), the winning information command process 4 is executed (S4322), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. On the other hand, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the command received from the main controller 110 includes the opening command (S4233). ), When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4233: Yes), first, the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). As a result, when the opening period of the jackpot starts, the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be set.

When the processing of S4234 is completed, the counter value of the advance notice count counter 223i is reset to 0, and the advance notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value "00H" to reset the setting of the continuous advance notice effect. (S4235), the display opening command is set (S4236), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4233, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4233: No), the process shifts to S4213.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop command has been received in the process of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the stop command process (see FIG. 35) is replaced. , The release time determination process is executed (S4237), and the process shifts to S4215. This release time determination process (S4237) determines whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state has been released, and when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of each reserved ball. It is a process for determining. The details of the release determination process (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the details of the above-mentioned state command processing (S4231) will be described. As described above, this state command process (S4231) is a process for updating the data of the game state storage area 223 g according to the game state indicated by the state command.

In this state command processing (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4801), and then the current state command is executed. , It is determined whether or not the command is a state command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not the command is a state command set by the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As described above, among the state commands composed of 1-byte data, the lower 2 bits are the data indicating the game state. That is, the lowest bit is a bit indicating whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and the lower second bit is a bit indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probabilistic state. In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined bit other than the lower two bits (for example, the most significant bit) is on, it indicates that the command is output at the end of the jackpot, and when it is off, the jackpot is hit. Indicates that the command is output at a time other than the end. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the data of the lower two bits of the state command is set according to the game state after the jackpot, and a predetermined bit Generate a state command with (for example, most significant bit) turned on. As a result, in the process of S4802, it is possible to easily determine whether the command is a state command output at the end of the jackpot simply by determining whether a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) is on.

In the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the command is the state command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of the jackpot, so the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4803). ), The above-mentioned release determination process is executed (S4804), and this process is terminated. By setting the notice prohibition release flag 223j to on in the process of S4802, the hold ball that was held at the start of the big hit and the hold newly acquired during the execution of the big hit in the release determination process (S4804). Based on the variation type of the sphere, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the release time determination process (release time determination process), which is exactly the same process when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is completed and when the jackpot ends (Refer to FIG. 68), it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. As a result, the description of the control program can be simplified as compared with the case where the execution possibility of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by a separate process according to the cancellation trigger of the advance notice lottery prohibition state. Therefore, the amount of work of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4802, if it is determined that the state command received from the main control device 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), each process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and is as it is. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the above-mentioned winning information command processing 4 (S4232) will be described. As described above, the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) is a processing executed in place of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

Of the winning information command processing 4 (S4322) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S4301 to S4311 is the same as each processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed.

Further, in the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S4301 is completed and before the start winning that triggered the output of the winning information command this time, the holding corresponding to the jackpot is held. It is determined whether or not the ball is already held (S4331). More specifically, the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data of each holding area are read out, and at least one of the data corresponds to the jackpot, whichever is the variation type (per special reach, per super reach, or per normal reach). ). That is, the logical sum of all the holding areas other than the holding area storing the data based on the current winning information command is calculated, and it is determined whether at least one of the upper three bits is on.

In the process of S4331, if it is determined that the hold ball corresponding to the jackpot is already held (one of the upper 3 bits of the logical sum is on) (S4331: Yes), the hold is based on the current start winning prize. Even if the continuous notice effect that extends to the ball is set, the continuous notice effect will be reset due to a big hit in the middle, so the continuous notice effect will be halfway (for example, continuous over 3 fluctuations). I should have set a notice effect, but the first change will be a big hit, etc.). Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated as it is without determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4331, if it is determined that the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot is not held (S4331: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the current winning information command. Each process of S4302 to S4311 for the purpose is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the details of the above-mentioned release time determination process (S4237, S4804) will be described. This release time determination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the execution range based on the fluctuation type of each reserved ball when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. .. That is, it is a process corresponding to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be canceled only when the stop command is received, but in the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery is also performed when the jackpot end timing is reached. The prohibited state is released. Therefore, the name of the process has been changed to "discrimination process at the time of cancellation".

Of the release time determination processes (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S4401 to S4415 is the same as each process of S4401 to S4415 of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the release time determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4403 is completed, the variation display during execution or the variation display executed next is the variation for notifying the jackpot. It is determined whether it is a display (S4441). More specifically, the data of the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the holding first area are read out, and it is determined whether the data corresponding to the variation type of the jackpot is stored in either area. If it is determined in the processing of S4441 that the data corresponding to the variation type of the jackpot is stored (S4441: Yes), even if the continuous advance notice effect is set, the advance notice effect is continuously applied over a plurality of variation displays. It means that a big hit will occur and the setting of the continuous advance notice effect will be reset before the execution of. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4441, when it is determined that neither the variable display being executed nor the variable display executed next is a big hit (S4441: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed and the execution range. Each process of S4404 to S4415 is executed to finish this process.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state not only when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided but also when a big hit occurs. Then, even at the end of the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is calculated, and the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed by taking into account the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous advance notice effect from being set based on the reserved ball with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot is finished, the continuous notice effect is not set for the hold ball with high expectation even though the continuous notice effect is set for the hold ball with low expectation, or the continuous notice effect is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is digested on the way and a reserved ball with a low degree of expectation is digested at the final variable display of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be preferably executed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the release time determination process (FIG. 68) is exactly the same process when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is completed and when the jackpot ends. By executing (see), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the description of the control program as compared with the case where the execution possibility of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by a separate process according to the cancellation trigger of the advance notice lottery prohibition state. can. Therefore, the amount of work of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end timing of the jackpot, the reserved ball already held at the start of the jackpot, and the hold based on the newly detected start prize during the jackpot. From each variation type of the ball, it was configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect after the end of the jackpot, but the timing of canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are It is not limited to this. For example, the start winning prize may be detected during the jackpot, and when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be canceled to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. When the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, the number of reserved balls cannot increase after that (that is, the fluctuation type with the highest expectation does not change until the end of the jackpot), so continuous notice production at the end timing of the jackpot This is because it is possible to obtain the same result as the determination of whether or not the execution of the above is performed. With this configuration, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the jackpot can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem such as a delay in the timing of starting the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the jackpot.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the jackpot and the case where the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled based on the end of the continuous advance notice effect are the same. Although the configuration is such that the release determination process (see FIG. 68), which is a process, is executed, it is not always necessary to execute the same process. A separate process may be prepared. With this configuration, the processing can be different between the end of the jackpot and the end of the continuous advance notice effect, so that the execution conditions of the continuous advance notice effect can be different. Thereby, for example, it is possible to realize a special control such that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted only when the final hit is made after the end of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the condition for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. In the fourth embodiment described above, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set during the jackpot, and the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at the end timing of the jackpot to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during the jackpot, and it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Then, in the ending effect of the jackpot, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not the continuous notice effect is started after the end of the jackpot. As a result, when the ending effect in a mode in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed, the continuous notice effect is performed even before the variable display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the production.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in a modified example of the fourth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (a). FIG. 69A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 69A, the ROM 222 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment described above (the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12A)). ), The difference is that the ending selection table 222h is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The ending selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to for determining the mode of the ending effect when the ending period of the jackpot is started. As described above, in this modification, the degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed after the end of the big hit is suggested by the mode of the ending effect. In this modified example, a normal mode (a mode with a low expectation that the continuous notice effect is executed) is performed at a ratio according to the judgment result of whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed based on the ending period of the jackpot. ), Or the ending effect of a special mode (a mode with high expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed) is determined from the ending selection table 222h (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

The details of the ending selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ending effect selection table 222h, the range of the value (random value) of the effect lottery counter 223f in which the normal ending with low expectation that the continuous advance notice effect is executed is determined, and the continuous advance notice effect are displayed. The range of the random number value (counter value) at which the notice suggestion ending with a high degree of expectation to be executed is determined is defined in association with each of the possibility of executing the continuous notice effect and the judgment result of the notice type. Although the illustration is omitted, in the normal ending, the background color during the ending effect is set to blue, while in the notice suggestion ending, the background color is set to red. With this configuration, the player can easily identify whether the ending is a normal ending or a warning suggestion ending simply by checking the background color. Therefore, at the start of the jackpot ending period, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the background will turn red.

As shown in FIG. 70, for the "notice effect A", "0 to 49" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and corresponds to the notice suggestion ending. "50 to 99" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) (see 222h1 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "notice effect A" is decided in the lottery for whether or not the continuous advance notice effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed, the notice suggestion ending is used as the ending effect of the jackpot at a rate of 50% (50/100). Is set.

Further, for the "notice effect B", "0 to 24" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the notice suggestion ending is defined. ) Is defined in association with "25 to 99" (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "notice effect B" is determined in the lottery for whether or not the continuous advance notice effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed, the notice suggestion ending will be used as the ending effect of the jackpot at a rate of 75% (75/100). Is set. For the "notice effect C", "0 to 9" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the normal ending, and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the notice suggestion ending. The range is defined as "10 to 99" in association with each other (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if "notice effect C" is determined in the lottery for whether or not the continuous advance notice effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed, the notice suggestion ending will be used as the ending effect of the jackpot at a rate of 90% (90/100). Is set.

On the other hand, "0 to 94" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the case where the continuous notice effect is not executed after the big hit (when the continuous notice effect is not executed), and the notice suggestion ending. As a range of random value (counter value) corresponding to, "95 to 99" is associated and defined (see 222h4 in FIG. 70). For this reason, if it is decided not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the lottery for whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed during the jackpot, only 5% (5/100) of the end effect of the big hit will be used. Notice suggestion ending is not set.

As described above, in this modification, when the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, the ratio of the advance notice suggestion ending set as the ending effect is set extremely low (at a ratio of 5%), so that the advance notice suggestion ending is set. At the time of execution, it is possible to improve the expectation for the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, in this modified example, the more the notice type with a high expectation of a big hit is decided, the higher the decision rate of the notice suggestion ending is set. That is, in the case of "notice effect A" in which the expectation of the jackpot is relatively low, the notice suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 50%, and "notice effect B" has a higher expectation of the jackpot than "notice effect A". In the case of, the notice suggestion ending is decided at a rate of 75%, and in the case of "notice effect C", which has the highest expectation of a big hit, the notice suggestion ending is decided at a rate of 90%. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the "notice effect C" is determined when the notice suggestion ending is executed. That is, when the advance notice suggestion ending is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further increased, so that the game can be performed by paying more attention to the mode of the ending effect.

In this modified example, the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending have different background colors during the execution of the ending effect, but this is just an example, and the player suggests the normal ending and the notice suggestion. Any effect mode can be used as long as the ending can be distinguished. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending (for example, in the normal ending, the characters "See you again!" Are displayed to suggest the notice. In the ending, the characters "Chance!" May be displayed, etc.), and the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different (for example, a female character is displayed in the normal ending, and a male character is displayed in the notice suggestion ending. Etc.). Further, the mode of the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the music to be played during the ending effect may be different or the illumination may be different. By making the emission colors and emission patterns of parts 29 to 33 different, the effect mode may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending.

Further, in the present modification, as the mode of the ending effect, only two types, a normal ending and a notice suggestion ending, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, four types of ending effects are provided, each of which has a high rate of selection when the notice effect A is executed after a big hit and a type with a high rate of selection when the notice effect B is executed. , The type with a high selection rate when the advance notice effect C is executed, and the type with a high selection rate when the continuous advance notice effect C is not executed may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect will be executed but also the effect type of the advance notice effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the aspect of the ending effect. , The game can be played by paying attention to the mode of the ending effect.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the RAM 223 in this modification has a configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment described above (the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12 (b))). , The difference is that the determination non-execution flag 223q is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the fourth embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. If the determination non-execution flag 223q is on, it indicates that the continuous advance notice effect has not been executed at the start of the ending period, and if it is off, it indicates that the continuous advance notice effect has been determined. ..

Here, in this modification, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to the upper limit value (4 pieces) at the start of the ending period. If it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, then a new start prize is detected during the execution of the ending effect, and the variation type of the new start prize is changed. , In the case of a higher expectation level than the fluctuation type of each reserved ball for which the continuous notice effect has already been set, a situation occurs in which the highly expected fluctuation display is executed immediately after the continuous notice effect is completed. ..

Therefore, in this modified example, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to the upper limit value at the start of the ending period and there is no possibility that the status of the reserved balls will change during the ending period. It is configured to be. If it is not determined at the start of the ending period whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed in consideration of the fluctuation types of all the reserved balls held at the end of the jackpot, so that the continuous advance notice effect is preferably executed. be able to.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is set to on when it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the start of the ending period (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the end of the jackpot. If set to off (see S4812 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the details of the command determination process 5 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. This command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is the same as the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to a command received from the main control device 110.

Of the command determination processes 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237, the command determination in the fourth embodiment is performed. The same processes as those of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 of process 4 (see FIG. 65) are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the state command has been received in the process of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the state command process in the fourth embodiment. Instead of (see FIG. 66), the state command process 5 is executed (S4241), and this process is terminated. Details of this state command process 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the opening command in the process of S4233 (see FIG. 71). S4233: No), it is determined whether or not there is an ending command among the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4242). Then, in the process of S4242, when it is determined that the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S4242: Yes), the ending command process for selecting the mode of the ending effect is executed (S4243), and this End the process. The details of this ending command processing (S4243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, the details of the above-described state command process 5 (S4241) will be described with reference to FIG. 72. Similar to the state command process (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment, the state command process 5 (S4241) is the data of the game state storage area 223 g according to the game state indicated by the state command received from the main control device 110. Is a process for updating.

Of the state command processes 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, in each process of S4801 to S4804, each process of S4801 to S4804 of the state command process (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed.

Further, in the state command process 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the current state command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether the determination non-execution flag 223q is on (S4811), and if the determination non-execution flag 223q is ON (S4811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. Since it indicates that it has not been executed, after setting the determination non-execution flag 223q to off (S4812), each process of S4803 and S4804 for determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed, and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4811, when it is determined that the determination non-execution flag 223q is off (S4811: No), the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit at the start of the ending period, so whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Since it means that has already been determined, each process of S4812, S4803, and S4804 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this state command process 5 (see FIG. 72), even if it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the start of the ending period, it is possible to execute the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in each jackpot, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of the reserved ball that was held at the start of the jackpot and the reserved ball that increased during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the ending command processing (S4243) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 73. As described above, this ending command process is a process for selecting the mode of the ending effect.

In this ending command processing (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value. If it is determined in the processing of S4902 that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), there is a possibility that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the highly expected variation type will increase during the ending period. Therefore, each process of S4903 and S4904 for executing the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. That is, the notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), the release time determination process is executed (S4904), and the process shifts to S4905. Since this release determination process is exactly the same as the release determination process (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the counter value of the advance notice number counter 223i is larger than 0. That is, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in the release time determination process (S4904), and it is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the continuous number of advance notice effects is set for the advance notice number counter 223i. In the process of S4905, when it is determined that the counter value of the advance notice number counter 223i is larger than 0 (S4905: Yes), the effect type of the continuous advance notice effect determined this time is specified from the state of the advance notice type flag 223k. (S4906), in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to the effect type specified in the process of S4906 is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f (S4907). ).

Next, the ending type (either the normal ending or the notice suggestion ending) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is determined from the comparison result obtained by the processing of S4907 (S4910), and the determined ending type is notified to the display control device 114. Set the display ending command for this (S4911), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4902, if it is determined that the value of the read special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. , There is a possibility that the start prize corresponding to the fluctuation type with higher expectation will be detected during the ending period (execution of continuous notice production based on the fluctuation type with the highest expectation held at the end of the jackpot) Since there is a possibility that it will not be possible to determine whether or not it is possible), the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON (S4908), and the process shifts to S4909. Further, in the process of S4905, when it is determined that the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is 0 (that is, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined) (S4905: No), the process shifts to S4909. ..

In the processing of S4909, in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of random values (counter values) corresponding to the non-execution of the continuous advance notice effect (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) and the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223f. (S4909), the process is shifted to S4910, and the ending type is determined and the display ending command is set in the same manner as when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined.

By executing this ending command process (see FIG. 73), the mode of the ending effect can be selected at a ratio according to the determination result of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. It is possible to indicate whether or not the command is executed and the degree of expectation according to the type of notice.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at a predetermined timing (at the start of the ending period) during the jackpot, and the possibility of executing the continuous advance notice effect is determined. It is said. Then, depending on the mode of the ending effect of the jackpot, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not the continuous notice effect is started after the end of the jackpot. As a result, when the ending effect in a mode in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed, the continuous notice effect is performed even before the variable display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the production.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending have different background colors during the execution of the ending effect, but this is just an example, and the player usually ends. And the notice suggestion ending can be made into an arbitrary production mode within a distinguishable range. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending (for example, in the normal ending, the characters "See you again!" Are displayed to suggest the notice. In the ending, the characters "Chance!" May be displayed, etc.), and the characters displayed during the ending effect may be different (for example, a female character is displayed in the normal ending, and a male character is displayed in the notice suggestion ending. Etc.). Further, the mode of the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the music to be played during the ending effect may be different or the illumination may be different. By making the emission colors and emission patterns of parts 29 to 33 different, the effect mode may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggestion ending.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the mode of the ending effect, only two types, a normal ending and a notice suggestion ending, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, four types of ending effects are provided, each of which has a high rate of selection when the notice effect A is executed after a big hit and a type with a high rate of selection when the notice effect B is executed. , The type with a high selection rate when the advance notice effect C is executed, and the type with a high selection rate when the continuous advance notice effect C is not executed may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous advance notice effect will be executed but also the effect type of the advance notice effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the aspect of the ending effect. , The game can be played by paying attention to the mode of the ending effect. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the expectation that the jackpot will be included in the reserved ball that was held at the end of the jackpot and the reserved ball based on the newly detected start prize during the jackpot is included in the ending effect. The configuration may be suggested by the aspect. Further, in this case, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation, a configuration may be provided in which an ending effect mode that is selected only when a big hit is included is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the mode of the ending effect and perform the game.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value (4) at the start timing of the ending period, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled and whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is determined. Although it was configured to determine, the timing of canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be configured in which a start winning prize is detected during a big hit, and when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed even if the start timing of the ending period is not reached. With this configuration, at the start timing of the ending period, it is only necessary to execute the selection process of the mode of the ending effect, and the timing of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed can be different. Therefore, since the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, the selection of the mode of the ending effect is delayed, the execution of the ending effect is delayed, or the continuous advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the inability to normally select the mode corresponding to the approval / disapproval determination result.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. In the first embodiment described above, the board surface configuration (arrangement of nails, arrangement of wind turbines, etc.) of the game board 13 is substantially symmetrical, and the flow provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13. A game ball is launched by a game ball launched toward the road (right-handed game ball) and a game ball launched toward the flow path provided on the left side (left-handed game ball). It was configured so that the period from the time when the ball was made to the first ball opening 64 or the variable winning device 65 was substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the game ball (right-struck game ball) launched toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13 is on the left side. It is configured so that the period until reaching the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 is longer than that of the game ball (left-handed game ball) fired toward the flow path provided in. .. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the variable display device unit 80 has a variable display device unit 80 rather than a game ball flowing down a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the left side is configured so that the rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a is higher.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The first execution is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is the variable display device unit in the game board 13 with respect to the board surface structure of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2). On the right side of the 80, a detour accessory 700 is provided so that the play ball can enter the inside. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, but this detour accessory 700 prolongs the time until the right-handed (launched on the right side of the game board 13) game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided for this purpose. In other words, in the detour accessory 700, the game ball launched by right-handed hit reaches the specific winning opening 65a rather than the period until the game ball launched by left-handed reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to lengthen the flow time of the right-handed game ball so that the time of is longer. In the fifth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. The period until reaching is configured to be 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, the details of the detour accessory 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a schematic view schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. 75, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 at the upper portion thereof. The game ball launched by right-handed strike can enter the inside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710. Further, at the lower part of the detour accessory 700, an opening 720 is provided for discharging the game ball flowing down in the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700. Further, in the detour accessory 700, in order to prevent the ball that has advanced inside from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the peripheral portion 730 provides the front side, the back side, and the left-right direction of the front view. It is surrounded by four directions. Since the peripheral edge portion 730 is composed of a translucent member (for example, a PS material), the player can easily visually recognize how the ball flows down.

Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the plane on the back side of the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially the same plane as the base plate 60, so that a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the plane on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed, so that the peripheral edge portion 730 and the glass unit 16 are in contact with each other. By creating a gap between the two, it is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward of the detour accessory 700 are provided inside the detour accessory 700. In each of the guide flow paths 740 to 790, the surface with which the spheres come into contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side of the front view and the inner wall on the front side of the front view). It is configured to be substantially the same as the distance between). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, the guide flow paths 740, 760, and 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. Further, the guide flow paths 750, 770, and 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. Then, the guide flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the detour accessory 700. That is, the flow paths inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the flow paths inclined downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are alternately provided.

The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first falls into the guidance flow path 740, and then flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 740. Then, when the game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 740, the game ball falls from the guidance flow path 740 toward the guidance flow path 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guidance flow path 750 in the lower right direction in the front view. When the flowing game ball reaches the lower end of the guidance flow path 750, the game ball falls into the guidance flow path 760 and flows down in the lower left direction in the front view along the inclination formed by the guidance flow path 760.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of falling down to the lower flow path. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide flow path 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720. Every time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows down changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction). The momentum of the ball flowing down (flowing speed) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the game ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is fired to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is launched to the lower part of the game board 13 (first entry port 64 or variable winning), as compared with firing the game ball to the left side of the game board 13. The time to reach (the area where the device 65 is arranged) can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is pivotally supported by the flow path support shafts 714 to 791, and clockwise or counterclockwise with each flow path support shaft as a rotation axis. It is configured to be rotatable. Further, in the rotation operation, the lower surface of each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is subjected to the rotation stop members 742a to 792a or the rotation stop members 742b to 792b provided on the lower side of each of the guidance flow paths 740 to 790. It stops by touching. This rotation operation will be described by taking the induction flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the induction flow path 740 is configured to be rotatable around the flow path support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the induction flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the upper half of the guidance flow path 740 is directed downward. A force is generated in the direction of rotation. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide flow path 740 clockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates clockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide flow path 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guidance flow path 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a member having a substantially cylindrical shape, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position does not shift due to the impact when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact. The structures of the other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and the rotation stop members 752b to 792b are the same as those of the rotation stop members 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guidance flow path 740, so that the lower half of the guidance flow path 740 is rotated downward. Orientation force is generated. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide flow path 740 counterclockwise in front view, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the induction flow path 740 comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the induction flow path 740 from rotating too much counterclockwise. That is, it is possible to prevent the guide flow path 740 from becoming too inclined to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed hitting can be surely flowed down to the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. .. When the game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide flow path 740 to 790 maximized, it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640. The route length of 740 to 790 and the maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down while maintaining the maximum inclination angle of all the guidance flow paths 740 to 790, the time for the game ball to reach the second entry port 640 is surely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the slopes of the guide flow paths 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game balls, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the guide flow paths 740 to 790 can be changed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700. Further, in the above description, the case where one ball travels on the guide flow path 740 has been described, but a state in which a plurality of balls travel on the same guide flow path may occur during the actual game. In this case, since the rotation operation of each of the guide flow paths 740 to 790 can be further irregular, the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners of the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners of the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, when each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 rotates, it is possible to make it difficult for the corner of the lower surface to come into contact with the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730. Therefore, since each guide flow path 740 to 790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral edge portion 730, a gap is formed between each guide flow path 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge portion 730, and the game ball is formed in the gap. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched or the game ball passing through the gap. Each guide flow path 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination due to its own weight when the game ball is not flowing down. For example, in a state where the sphere does not flow down the guide flow path 740, the guide flow path 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow path support shaft 741 as the rotation axis due to its own weight. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a, and stops when the lower surface of the induction flow path comes into contact with the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow paths 750 to 790 are configured to rotate until the game balls come into contact with the rotation stop members 752a to 792a due to their own weight in a state where the game ball is not flowing down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while each of the guidance flow paths 750 to 790 is rotating, or whether the game ball flows down when the rotation operation of each of the guidance flow paths 750 to 790 is completed. The flow speed of the sphere can be changed accordingly. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to aim at the second entrance 640.

It should be noted that each of the induction flow paths 740 to 790 may be configured so as not to rotate by its own weight but to rotate only by the passage of the game ball. Further, for example, each induction flow path 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 74, below the detour accessory 700, a large number of nails are used to limit the flow direction of the game ball flowing out of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700. Is placed. With these nails, all the game balls that have flowed out of the detour accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65 (the first ball entry port 64). It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down in the direction). The game ball that has fallen on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 74, since the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved surface member is in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of the 800 can be won (winned) into the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable winning device 65, a relatively wide space (wider than one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (Flow path) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is open and the game ball is fired by left-handed, many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but some game balls (for example, 10). The ratio of one ball to the ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the front view of the game board 13. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. Basically, it takes longer for the right-handed player to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but depending on the reflection direction of the game ball, the ejection situation, etc., the left-handed player will reach the specific winning opening 65a. The possibility that the time to reach the ball will be long is not 0 (for example, when the game ball launched to the left temporarily stops, or when the ball is clogged in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. etc). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the left side. It can be rephrased that (the game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side tends to have a shorter period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the ratio of the right-handed game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is set, and the left-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to finish the jackpot game early), some loss (a ratio of about 1 in 10 balls is wasted) during the jackpot game. With the ball) in mind, it is possible to play a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting left. On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handed, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. Can be made. Therefore, since it is possible for each player to select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability that suits the taste of each player. Each round of jackpots ends when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. Will be done. Even if you start firing the game ball by hitting right after each round of jackpot starts, 10 game balls are passed through the detour accessory 700 before 30 seconds elapse, and the specific winning opening 65a (10 game balls can be inserted in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage in the winning spherical surface (the round ends before a predetermined number of game balls win the specific winning opening 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed on the upper left side of the front view and the upper right side of the front view in the main display area Dm. , A display area HR4 having a substantially rectangular shape and a larger area than the display areas HR2 and HR3 is formed below the display area HR2 and the display area HR3. In the display area HR2, an image imitating a left-pointing arrow is displayed, and the characters "left-handed high-speed mode" and "the jackpot can be quickly digested" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit to the left during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested in a relatively short period of time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively high speed). Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76, an image imitating a right-pointing arrow is displayed in the display area HR3, and the characters "right-handed low-speed mode" and "the jackpot can be thoroughly digested" are displayed. Characters and are displayed. From these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the jackpot is hit right during the jackpot, the jackpot can be digested over a relatively long time (the jackpot progresses at a relatively slow speed). Can be made to.

As shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is being hit are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB imitating a treasure box containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR4, and " A display area HR6 with the characters "big hit" is formed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot game is being executed. Further, on the upper left side inside the display area HR4, a display area HR5 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed. In the example of FIG. 76, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" (prize balls up to now). Information indicating the comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts) is displayed. The display contents displayed in these display areas HR5 make it possible for the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open, the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the left-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be higher than the rate of entering the ball in 65a. With these configurations, for a player who wants to advance the jackpot game speedily (want to win a large number of prize balls in a shorter time), some loss (1 ball in 10 balls) during the jackpot game is executed. With a certain percentage of wasted balls), it is possible to play a game aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting left. On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate wasted balls (losses) as much as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handed, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be longer. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible for each player to select his / her favorite playability during the execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the playability that suits the taste of each player.

In the fifth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball launched by right-handed hit reaches the variable winning device 65 is left-handed. The game ball launched by the player is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 65. That is, by making the path length when the game ball launched by right-handed hitting down flows down longer than the path length when the game ball launched by left-handed hitting flows down, it is better to hit right-handed. It was configured so that the flow time was longer than that of hitting, but it is not limited to this. For example, a known crune means may be provided in place of the detour accessory 700 in the flow path on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. With this configuration, the period from reaching the crune means to passing through the crune means can be lengthened, so that the flow time of the game ball launched by right-handed can be lengthened. Further, for example, instead of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 may be provided. By forming the right side of the game board 13 with a substance having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side (for example, an elastic body such as rubber), the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is the base plate 60. It may be configured so that it is easily decelerated by the friction of. Further, instead of the detour accessory 700, the flow on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the flow path on the right side are different from each other, so that the flow on the left side flows down the flow path on the right side. It may be configured so that the period until reaching the lower region (the region where the first entry port 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) on the game board 13 is longer than when the game board 13 flows down the road.

In the fifth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the game playability when left-handed and the game playability when right-handed are set in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3, respectively. However, it is not limited to this, although it was configured to be displayed. For example, during the jackpot, only the image prompting the left-handed hit may be displayed, or only the image prompting the right-handed hit may be displayed. By displaying only the image that encourages left-handed hitting, the jackpot can be completed in a short time, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, by displaying only the image that encourages right-handed hitting, it is possible to reduce waste balls (game balls that enter the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a). The profit of the player in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, when the player is notified of the firing direction during the jackpot, the firing direction to be notified may be different depending on the type of the jackpot, the type of the effect executed during the jackpot, and the like. More specifically, for example, when a probability variation jackpot is reached, a variable display effect (an effect mode that is executed only when the probability variation jackpot is reached) is executed in which the main symbols (probability variation symbols) with odd numbers are aligned. It is configured to decide by lottery whether to execute a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed when a normal big hit is made) in which the main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are aligned. Then, when it becomes a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, and a production in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot is executed during the jackpot. .. In this case, an effect mode for notifying whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (for example, an effect in which it is not known whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and an immediate notification at the end of the first round The player is made to select (that is, an operation means such as a button or a lever that can be operated by the player) between the effect mode to be performed and the effect mode in which the notification is not known in each round of the jackpot. Is provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and then the selection of the effect mode may be executed in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the jackpot (the jackpot of the normal symbol notification) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, the configuration suggests right-handed strike. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to secure a longer period for the player to select the effect mode, so that the player can more reliably select the desired effect mode. On the other hand, if the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the jackpot is notified by the variable display effect in which the probability variation symbols are aligned), the left-handed hit may be notified during the jackpot. .. With this configuration, the period until the jackpot ends can be shortened, so that a large number of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, for example, when a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is achieved and a production in which the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot is executed in the first round of the jackpot. Then, in the effect, an effect (operation effect) for urging the operation of the operating means may be executed. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means, and an effect of prompting the player to continuously press the push button within a predetermined period is executed. Then, the display mode changes according to the number of times the push button is pressed (for example, the gauge of the indicator accumulates), and the display mode changes to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge changes). It may be configured to notify that it is a probabilistic jackpot by accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, if it becomes a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, and if the effect that the normal symbols are aligned is determined by the lottery (when the operation effect is executed), the right-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot. Since the round period of one round can be made relatively long, it is possible to secure a longer period for performing the operation effect. Therefore, the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced. On the other hand, if it becomes a probabilistic jackpot and the effect that the probabilistic symbols are aligned is determined by lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the jackpot is made by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until the end can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, instead of letting the player select the effect mode when notifying whether or not the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (voice effect) played during the execution of the jackpot game is selected. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handed may be notified during the period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (directed by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the song selection menu screen. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button that can be operated by the player in place of or in addition to the frame button 22, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content for the operation means. The image of 1 is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, the images corresponding to each music are arranged in a vertical row, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears to be lit, and the other images appear to be extinguished. It is configured as follows. Further, as the operation means, three types of buttons are provided: a button corresponding to the up movement (up button), a button corresponding to the down movement (down button), and a button corresponding to the decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting the pressing of the upper button during the song selection period, the image that was lit until just before the pressing is switched to the lit appearance, and the image that was placed one above is switched to the lit appearance. (The lit appearance image moves upward by one). Similarly, when a press on the lower button is detected, the lit visual image is configured to move downward by one. Further, by detecting the pressing of the enter button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that is lit at the time of pressing is determined as the music to be played during the current jackpot. That is, it is set as a song to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the player's favorite music can be played during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot game can be further improved.

Under such circumstances, if the configuration is such that the left-handed hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so that the song selection period is shortened. Therefore, there is a possibility that the music selection period ends before the player selects a favorite music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the playback by the enter button. On the other hand, one round is configured to notify the right-handed hit during the first round (song selection period) of the jackpot (the jackpot for which the execution of the effect of selecting a song is determined) in which the song selection period is set. Since the round period of the eyes can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operates the up button and the down button so that the corresponding image looks lit. It is possible to secure a longer period for making a decision (pressing the decision button). As a result, it is possible to reliably select a favorite song without irritating the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a song can be enhanced. In addition, by configuring the configuration to notify the left-handed hit during the first round of the jackpot for which the song selection period is not set (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot effect is executed), it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and speedily. You can digest the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the effect mode executed during the jackpot.

Further, in the case where the effect (operation effect) for urging the player to operate the operation means, such as setting the song selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined ratio when the big hit is obtained, the player's past The firing direction to be notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has performed an operation on the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect is set. Then, when starting the jackpot with the operation effect set, the game is played over the jackpot with the operation effect set for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in the past based on the stored past operation history. If the player is not performing the operation, the left-handed hit may be notified, while if the player has operated the jackpot within a predetermined number of times, the right-handed hit may be notified. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even if an operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls are given in a short time by notifying the left-handed hit and ending the first round of the jackpot earlier. While realizing the playability that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation effect, the execution period of the operation effect is extended by notifying the right-handed hit, and the player can perform the operation effect. It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed hit is a winning spherical surface because the board surface configuration is such that the right-handed hit has a higher ball entry rate to the specific winning opening 65a than the left-handed hit. The configuration was set to be slightly advantageous, but the configuration for making right-handed hitting advantageous on the prize spherical surface is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the game ball launched by right-handed hit and the game ball fired by left-handed hitting into the specific winning opening 65a the same, the right side of the specific winning opening 65 (that is, left-handed) A general winning opening having a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter and the game ball hit to the right can enter. That is, in a state where the specific winning opening 65a is open, the left-handed game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a and are out. While flowing down to the mouth 66, the right-handed game ball may basically enter the specific winning opening 65a, and some game balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when a right-handed hit is made, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning opening is the prize ball by the jackpot (that is, the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a). Since it is given in addition to the prize ball), it is possible to take advantage of the prize spherical surface by hitting right during the big hit. Therefore, the player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit right with the expectation that the jackpot period will be longer. On the other hand, for players who want to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, let them hit left during the jackpot, with the expectation that it will be a little more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting on the prize spherical surface. Can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, when a big hit is made, the feature when the player hits the right side and the feature when the player hits the left side are displayed on the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76). ), Not limited to this. For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether the game board 13 is hit right or left at a predetermined position (for example, the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and the middle of the flow path on the right side). Etc. may be provided, and the direction in which the player is firing the game ball may be determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the effect during the jackpot may be changed according to the determined firing direction. For example, when right-handed strike is detected, the display area HR2 is turned off and the display area HR3 is turned on, while when left-handed hit is detected, the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned on. It may be configured to look like it is turned off. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of game playability will be achieved depending on the firing direction selected by the player.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 89. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the flow path provided on the right side of the game board 13 is more connected to the flow path provided on the right side than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Is more likely to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) when the slingshot flows down. It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flow direction of the game ball, and the like. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is open (that is, the jackpot game is being executed), the game is played by right-handed hitting rather than when the game ball is fired by left-handed hitting. A game board 13 having a board structure that makes it easier to win (win a ball) in the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired is adopted.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a right variable winning device 650 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65 as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during the jackpot. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and a game ball enters during the jackpot, so that the probability change state of the special symbol is changed after the jackpot ends. Granted. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of winning balls are given when the game balls enter. In addition, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right. Details will be described later, but hitting left in the first round. If you continue to do so, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a can be entered increases, but the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right specific winning opening 650a. Is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a can be entered decreases, but the reached game. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a is high. As a result, the game playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the game playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the number of balls reached is small but the ball entry rate is high).

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The sixth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, in the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment, a curved surface member 810 is provided in place of the curved surface member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment. It differs in that it is. As shown in FIG. 77, a right variable winning device 650 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810.

The right variable winning device 650 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular right specific winning opening 650a in a substantially central portion thereof. This specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by the opening / closing door 650f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot is started, the opening / closing door 650f1 is the jackpot type. It is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which the ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650a and the state in which the ball is difficult to enter are switched by a specific switching pattern. Then, when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a while the opening / closing door 650f1 is open (while the right specific winning opening 650a can be entered), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is changed. , The probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set (the probability change flag 203e is set to on at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, if the game ball never enters the right specific winning opening 650a in one jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a low probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state of the normal symbol. It is set (100 is set in the value of the time saving and medium counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a than when the game ball never enters the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot. (The game state after the big hit is advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 77, since the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged along the curved path of the upper surface of the curved member 810, the game ball that has passed through the detour accessory 700 and has fallen to the curved member 810 By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the right specific winning opening 650a can be easily reached. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right specific winning opening 650a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. Further, the curved surface member 820 provided below the flow path on the left side of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved surface member 810. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form an inclination in a downward direction from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when the game ball hit left and passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, the upper surface of the curved surface member 820 is rolled and the curved surface member 820 is rolled. Reach the right edge. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right side in the front view flows down in the lower right direction in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. Then, it reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved surface member 810 can easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a by rolling the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 in the right direction when viewed from the front. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the right variable winning device 650 regardless of whether the player hits right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can be launched in the desired direction.

Next, the structure of the right variable winning device 650 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 (a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed (a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a). FIG. 78 (b) shows the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 in the middle of switching from the closed state to the open state (the game ball is switched from the difficult-to-enter state to the open state to the right specific winning opening 650a). It is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in a state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in a state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, the right variable winning device of the left end of the opening / closing door 650f1 for closing the right specific winning opening 650a and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810. It is smoothly connected to the part on the left side of 650 (left floor surface 810b) with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, a convex portion 650g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side of the front view passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 and rolling to the right is provided. It is provided. Since the convex portion 650g1 projects from the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1, the game ball that has rolled on the opening / closing door 650f1 from the left side of the opening / closing door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 and rolls. The movement stops. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view, so that the game ball whose rolling is hindered by the convex portion 650g1 can be opened / closed. The upper surface of the door 650f1 flows down toward the lower left in the front view. Then, the left floor surface 810b is rolled to the left in the front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66. The game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a stronger flow force due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so that the opening / closing door In the state where the 650f1 is closed, it is possible to get over the convex portion 650g1 and let it flow down to the direction of the out port 66. By arranging the right variable winning device 650 in an inclined manner in this way, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating on the upper part of the opening / closing door 650f1 during the period when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and to the out opening 66. Can be made to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right specific winning opening 650a is switched to a state where the ball can be entered, the opening / closing door 650f1 blocking the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is opened. The opening / closing door 650f1 is opened by sliding to the left in the front view. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), while the opening / closing door 650f1 is being opened, the game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view can enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but rolls from the left side of the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 650 g1 and it becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, but when the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b have almost the same height (almost smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the flow direction of the game ball reaching the right variable winning device 650 when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and opened will be described. .. First, FIG. 79A is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the heights of the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 provided at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the left floor surface 810b are substantially the same. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650 g1. That is, the ball can be easily entered (winned) in the right specific winning opening 650a without being hindered by the convex portion 650g1. In addition, a game ball that has rolled from the right side of the front view (flowing down along the right floor surface 810a) with respect to the right variable winning device 650 also hinders the winning (winning) of the right specific winning opening 650a. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right specific winning opening 650a.

FIG. 79B is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 79B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction in the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is subjected to gravity in the downward direction to the lower left due to the inclination in the upward direction to the upper right formed by the opening / closing door 650f1. Therefore, the momentum of rolling is reduced. Further, at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, a convex portion 650g1 protruding upward from the other parts of the opening / closing door 650f1 is provided, so that the momentum of rolling to the right is strong, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is almost closed. Even if it is possible to climb all the way up, the convex portion 650g1 prevents it from reaching the right floor surface 810a side. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening / closing door 650f1 and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is in a state in which sufficient momentum is added to overcome the convex portion 650g1 due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the opening / closing door 650f1. As a result, the curved surface member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the out port 66.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 (right specific winning opening 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the sixth embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (big hit A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650a is set so that the ball can be entered for a relatively long period and the ball is entered for a relatively short period. A jackpot type (big hit B6) that is set to a possible state is provided. The longer the ball can be entered, the more chances that the game ball will be entered into the right specific winning opening 650a, so the game state after the big hit is advantageous (the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol). State) is more likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B6 (the game state after the jackpot is likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a set in the first round of the jackpot A6 is referred to as an opening pattern capable of winning a V, and the right identification set in the first round of the jackpot B6 is referred to. The opening pattern of the winning opening 650a is referred to as an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V.

FIG. 80A is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when a V winning open pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot A6) is set. .. When the V winning open pattern is set, the right specific winning opening 650a is first kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, after 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right specific winning opening 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 80A, it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right specific winning opening 650a until the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened. Therefore, it will be in a completely opened state 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have passed (that is, 2.0 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right specific winning opening 650a is started. .. This closing operation, like the opening operation, is completed in 0.3 seconds (it is completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). Then, when the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the state in which the right specific winning opening 650a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (that is, 2.8 seconds have passed from the start of the first round), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, maintained in the open state for 0.2 seconds, and closed over 0.3 seconds.

After that, the state of being completely closed for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened over 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is for 0.2 seconds. A series of operations that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. By this repetitive operation, in the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated 6 times in the first round of the jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 80A, the final opening / closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 for lengthening the flow time of the game ball is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. .. When the right-handed game ball passes through the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, etc. are arranged, etc. ) Is reached in 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right-handed hit is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 within a time of at least 7 seconds or more from the start of the round. Therefore, when right-handed, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 around the start of the last opening period (8 seconds after the start of the first round) in the opening pattern in which V winning is possible. .. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can be inserted into the right specific winning opening 650a only in the last opening period out of the six opening periods. be.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, it takes about 1 to 2 seconds to reach the area below the game board 13 (first ball opening 64, variable winning device 65, right variable winning device). Since the game ball reaches the area where the 650 is equally arranged), if the game ball is immediately left-handed at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. can. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. However, as described above, the game ball that has rolled from the left side toward the right specific winning opening 650a has an opening period of 1 (completely closed after the opening is started) as compared with the game ball that has rolled from the right side. In 0.8 seconds), the period during which the ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 650a is shortened. Further, when the player hits the left side, the number of game balls which cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 increases as compared with the case where the player hits the right side. That is, when the game ball cannot reach the curved surface member 810 and enters the out port 66 by passing through between a plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, or when the ball enters the out port 66. 1 The ball may enter the ball entry port 64. Therefore, when the opening pattern that allows V winning is set, the number of game balls that reach while the right specific winning opening 650a is open by hitting the left in the first round is large, but it is entered. It is a game playability in which the ratio of balls is low and the number of wasted balls is large. On the other hand, when a right-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls that reach while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is small, but the rate of entering balls is high. It becomes. Therefore, since the game playability of the first round can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot. In addition, the possibility that a game ball will enter during one round is almost the same (for example, about 80% ratio) regardless of whether the player hits right or left in the first round of the jackpot. As described above, the opening period, the board composition, and the like are set.

FIG. 80B is a diagram showing the time course of the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern (opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot B6) is set, which makes it difficult to win a V. be. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize is set, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after it is completely opened. NS. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to insert a game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a while the right specific winning opening 650a is open, regardless of whether the player hits left or right ( The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player can be expected that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A6 (a V winning open pattern is set).

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening / closing door 650f1 during the opening period of 1 when the V winning open pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 81, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball is placed against the right specific winning opening 650a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 81 (a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the opening / closing door 650f1 slides to the left in the front view and is housed inside the curved surface member 810. When 0.1 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right specific winning opening 650a that is not blocked by the opening / closing door 650f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (FIG. 81). See (b)). As a result, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction can enter the right specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction is tilted upward in the upper right direction formed by the portion of the opening / closing door 650f1 that is not housed inside the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 650g1 makes it right. It is prevented from entering the specific winning opening 650a. That is, the game ball that has rolled from the left side cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650a in the same manner as in the state where the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. The state in which the game ball that has rolled from the right side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a and the game ball that has rolled from the left side cannot enter the ball continues for 0.1 seconds. Then, when 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening / closing door 650f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (convex portion 650g1 and left floor surface 810b). Since the width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), the game ball that has reached the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. (See FIG. 81 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side of the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a. That is, both the game ball that has rolled from the right direction (the game ball that was launched by hitting the right) and the game ball that has rolled from the left direction (the game ball that has been launched by hitting the left) are both right specific winning openings 650a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. After that, until the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the game balls that have rolled from both directions (both the right side and the left side) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

As shown in FIG. 81, 0.3 seconds after the opening operation is started, the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 650g1 is exposed to the outside (opening / closing door). 650f1 is completely open) (see FIG. 81 (d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds, the closing operation is started. In this closing operation, the operation opposite to the opening operation is executed over the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, during the period from the start of the opening operation to the closing of the opening / closing door 650f1 again, the game ball can enter the right variable winning device 650a during the opening operation during right-handed hitting. It is 0.6 seconds from the time when 0.1 seconds have passed from the start to 0.1 seconds before the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, in the case of left-handed hitting, it is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening / closing door 650f1 is completely closed. That is, the rate at which the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 enters is higher when the right-handed ball is hit than when the left-handed ball is hit.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the period during which the game ball is possible for the right specific winning opening 650a is the game ball that reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side or reaches from the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a game ball. As a result, when the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 from the right side, it can be expected that the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a. Further, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, more game balls are sent to the right variable winning device 650 in the first round of the jackpot in the case of hitting left than in the case of hitting right. On the other hand, it is configured to reach. Therefore, when a left-handed hit is made in the first round of the jackpot, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but it is possible to realize a game property in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball, but on the right. When a ball is hit, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650a, but the game property with few chances of entering the ball can be realized. Therefore, since the game playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the first round.

In the sixth embodiment, by providing the convex portion 650g1 at the right end of the opening / closing door 650f1, the period during which the game ball that has rolled from the left side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a is changed from the right side. Although the configuration is such that the moving game ball is shorter than the period during which the ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 650 g1. Even if the convex portion 650g1 is deleted, the opening / closing door 650f1 rolls from the left side during the opening operation (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 81B) due to the inclination of the opening / closing door 650f1 in the upward direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right specific winning opening 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the 1st round of the jackpot A6 (the jackpot in which a V winning open pattern is set) in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of the jackpot A6 is started, the characters "a mode in which a few hits are hit by left-handed" and "a mode in which several hits are hit by left-handed" are added to the display area HR2 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The words "It's hard to get into V though the number of arrivals is large!" And an image imitating a left-pointing arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, when left-handed, more game balls can be reached to the right variable winning device 650, but it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the game becomes playable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, for the display area HR3, the characters "Right-handed one-shot deadly mode", "The number of arrivals is small, but it is easy to enter V!" And the arrow pointing to the right are imitated. The image is displayed. According to these display contents, when right-handed hitting is performed, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 decreases, while the game balls easily enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning easily). It is possible to easily make the player understand that it becomes sex.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, an image imitating the right variable winning device 650 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed in the display area HR4 in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the front side of the variable winning device 650 is displayed with a decoration imitating the letter "V", and the upper left side of the front view in the display area HR4 is "Aim for V! The display area HR7 in which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed. Based on these display contents, by inserting the game ball into the right variable winning device 650, which is decorated to imitate the letter "V", the result is advantageous for the player (after the jackpot ends). It is possible to easily make the player understand that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, with respect to the display area HR4, the right variable winning device 650 faces the left side and the upper right side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650, respectively. The image of the arrow is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side of the front view with respect to the image imitating the right variable winning device 650 has the characters "hit a few hits", and the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the front view. The image has the words "One-shot deadly". According to these display contents, when the player hits the left according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (selects the mode in which several hits are hit), the game ball is displayed from the front left direction with respect to the right variable winning device 650. It is possible to easily make the player understand that the player is rolling. In addition, when the player strikes right according to the display content of the display area HR3 (selects the one-shot deadly mode), the game ball rolls from the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650. This can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction the player should pay attention to to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is open with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 9A). The difference is that the pattern table 202aa is added. In addition, the contents of the first type selection table 202b have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines the opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a in the first round of the jackpot (either the opening pattern that allows V winning or the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win V) for each jackpot type. .. Data indicating the start timing of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 is defined in the opening pattern table 202aa. At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the opening pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is selected from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as the opening pattern of the first round. By prescribing the opening pattern (start timing of the opening / closing operation) in the opening pattern table 202aa, the opening / closing door 650f1 can be opened / closed with the same opening pattern at each jackpot.

Next, the details of the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83 (b). FIG. 83B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 79" for the range of "big hit A6". Are associated with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). This "big hit A6" has 16 rounds, and it is possible to put a game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a at a rate of about 80%, which is an open pattern that allows V winning in the first round of the big hit. This is the jackpot type for which the open pattern) is set. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit A6" are 80, which are "0 to 79". In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A6" is determined is 80% (80/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit" for the range of "80 to 99". "B6" is specified in association with each other (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). This "big hit B6" has 16 rounds, and there is an opening pattern in which it is difficult to win a V in the first round of the jackpot (an opening pattern in which it is almost impossible to put a game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a). This is the jackpot type that is set. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit B6" are 20 of "80 to 99". In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B6" is determined is 20% (20/100).

In the sixth embodiment, the jackpot type in which the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win V is provided, but it is not always necessary to provide the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win V. For example, instead of setting an open pattern that allows V prizes to be set whenever a big hit occurs, by reducing the V prize rate, the rate at which the probability change state is set after the big hit is the same as in the sixth embodiment. It may be adjusted so as to be. With this configuration, the number of open patterns can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the open pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment has the probability variation setting flag 203aa and the probability variation passage with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 8) of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the counter 203ab, the winning number counter 203ac, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad, the remaining ball timer 203ae, the probability variation effective flag 203ag, the probability variation effective timer 203ah, and the discharge number counter 203af are added. There is.

The probability change setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning device 650, a probability change switch 650e (not shown) is arranged at a position where a game ball entered from the right specific winning opening 650a always passes. When the output of the probability change switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that the game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a, and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to on (S1305 in FIG. 88, FIG. 89). (See S1410). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 87). The probability change setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203aa was set to on when the power was turned on, it was determined whether the game ball had passed the probability change switch 650e before the power off was cut off, and it was determined that the game ball had passed. Only in that case, the probability variation setting flag 203aa may be formally set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 650e has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203ab, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage to the hall by determining an illegality in which only the probability change setting flag 203aa is rewritten to be turned on and the power is turned on again in the state where the power is turned off.

The probability variation passage counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 650e after the end of one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of jackpot). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won in the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 have been discharged in the first round by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203ab and the discharge number counter 203af described later. .. The probability variation passage counter 203ab is updated by adding one value each time the passage of the probability variation switch 650e is detected in a predetermined period (so-called ball brushing period) after the end of one round (FIG. 89). S1409). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the right specific winning opening 650a and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 89). The probability variation pass counter 203ab is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. .. Specifically, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the ball entry detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned probability variation switch 650e provided in the right variable winning device 650. Based on this, it is added and updated one by one (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 (the total value of the winning number counter 203ac and the probability variation passing counter 203ab) and the number discharged (the total value). After it is determined whether or not it matches the value of the discharge number counter 203af), it is reset to the initial value “0” (see S1415 in FIG. 89). The value of the winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203ad is a ball for discharging the remaining game ball when the game ball remains inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the end of the round. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timer. When the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to on, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203ae, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

In the remaining ball timer 203ae, when one round was completed and the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a was closed, the game ball remained inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. In this case, it is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the remaining game ball to be discharged has elapsed. The time required for the game ball to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the sixth embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as an upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls match. It is determined whether or not it is (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. In addition, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the right variable winning device 650 and suppress the fraudulent act of causing the game ball to flow down to the probability change switch 65e at the timing of the first round of the jackpot.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203aa is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 650e. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The discharge number counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside from the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 in each round of the jackpot. The discharge number counter 203af is provided at the ball discharge port (provided at the ball discharge port) through the ball discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or right variable winning device 650). Each time the ball discharge port switch is turned on by passing a game ball), the value is added and updated by 1 (see S1403 in FIG. 89). This discharge number counter 203af is a variable winning device 65 or a right variable winning device. After the match between the number of balls winning in the device 650 and the number of ejected balls is determined, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89. First, the jackpot control process 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. This jackpot control process 7 (S921) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) of the main control device 110 in place of the jackpot control process (see FIGS. 30, S904) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). It is a process to be performed.

Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011, the jackpot control process (and FIG. 30) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 of (see) are executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the opening according to the round and the jackpot type The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1021), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set. The jackpot end processing of (S1022) is executed to end this processing. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the right designation are specified. The winning process for performing the processing according to the winning of the winning opening 650a is executed (S1023). The details of this winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the completion of the winning process (S1023), an abnormal process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a is normally discharged is executed (S1024). This process ends. The details of this abnormality processing (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1021) described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1021). As described above, this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) is a process for setting the opening operation according to the round and the jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No). ), The opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process shifts to S1105.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the opening pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the opening pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the processing of S1103, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot A6, the opening pattern that can win V (see FIG. 80 (a)) is read, but if the jackpot type this time is jackpot B6, it is difficult to win V. Open pattern (see FIG. 80 (b)) is read out.

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the open pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process is shifted to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1105), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), the right specific winning opening 650a can be controlled to open and close in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1022) will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, this jackpot end process (S1022) is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end processing (S1022), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203aa is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), this time. Since it means that no game ball has entered (winned) into the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, by setting the value of the time saving medium counter 203f to 100, the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1202), and the process shifts to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203aa is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a during this big hit. By setting the probability change flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1203), and the process shifts to S1204.

In the process of S1204 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204). The probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to off (S1205), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 87), an appropriate gaming state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203aa.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1023) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. As described above, this winning process (S1023) is a process for performing processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a. In this winning process (S1023), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round validity period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if the round validity period is not (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1301: Yes), then one of the specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is awarded. If it is determined whether or not it has been detected (S1302) and it is determined that no prize has been detected in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that a prize has been detected for the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203ac to update (S1303). ). Next, if it is determined whether or not this round is the first round (S1304), and if it is determined to be the first round (S1304: Yes), the right specific winning opening 650a is set in the first round of the jackpot. Since it means that the ball has been won (winning), the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305), and the process shifts to S1306. On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, if it is determined that this round is not the first round (S1304: No), the processing of S1305 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1306.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306), and when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306: Yes), move to the process of S1308 and set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1307), and the round time is determined. If it has passed (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 and the end of this round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), it is not necessary to end the round, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S1307, when the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set open pattern is reached, while in the case of the second and subsequent rounds, it is determined. When 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has passed.

In the process of S1308, the closure of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a) is set (S1308), and the closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1309). Next, the ball brushing period is set by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203ad to ON (S1310), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the abnormality handling (S1024) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. As described above, this abnormal processing (S1024) is a processing for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a is normally discharged. In this abnormal processing (S1024), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is ejected from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device). Whether it was discharged) is determined (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203af (S1403), and the process proceeds to the process of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is off (S1404: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently in the ball brushing period, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is set to 1. Is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball brushing period (when 0.8 seconds have passed from the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer When it is determined that the value of 203ae is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the ball brushing period after the end of the first round. (S1407) If it is determined that the ball brushing period is after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 650e (S1408), and the probability change switch. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through 650e (S1408: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203ab (S1409), and the probability change setting flag 203aa is set to ON. Then (S1410), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball-brushing period is the ball-brushing period after the second and subsequent rounds are completed (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410. This process is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (the end timing of the ball brushing period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharges (the number of discharge counters 203af) It is determined whether the number of winnings (value) matches the number of winnings (the total value of the value of the winning number counter 203ac and the value of the probability variation passing counter 203ab) (S1411).

In the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to the process of S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 650e3 while the right specific winning opening 650a is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S1411: Yes), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1413. In the process of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to off (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203ac, the discharging number counter 203af, and the probability variation passing counter 203ab are reset (S1415), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 89), ball clogging occurs inside each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 and right variable winning device 650), and so on, each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). , And the occurrence of a problem that the game ball that has entered the right variable winning device 650a) is not normally discharged can be detected and notified at an early stage.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a privilege (prize ball) is given to the player when the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game (during the special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right variable winning device 650, are provided. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters during the jackpot, in addition to the winning ball, it is special after the jackpot ends. The probability variation state of the symbol is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a, whether or not the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous to the player changes. Therefore, in the first round of the big hit, the right specific winning opening 650a is reached. It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters.

The right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when hitting left and when hitting right, and if the player continues to hit left in the first round, the right specific winning opening Although the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 increases while the 650a can be entered, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right specific winning opening 650a is low. .. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 while the right specific winning opening 650a can be entered decreases, but the reached game. It is configured so that the rate at which the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a is high. That is, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 during a predetermined period (the period until the end of the opening pattern of one round) (the number of opportunities to win a prize in the right specific winning opening 650a) ( Element) is configured so that left-handed is more advantageous than right-handed. Further, the aspect (element) of the ease of entering a ball (ball entry rate) with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is configured so that right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. As a result, the game playability in the first round of the jackpot can be made different according to the launch direction of the game ball, so that the game playability of each player's preference (the rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a is low). Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls reached is large, or a game property in which the number of balls reached is small but the ball entry rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to realize playability that suits the tastes of more players, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the sixth embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of a big hit, it is more advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate than when a left-handed hit is made (right). The game ball that has reached the variable winning device 650a can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650a). On the other hand, when the ball is hit to the left, the number of balls reached is larger than that when the ball is hit to the right. The configuration is advantageous in terms of surface (more game balls can easily reach the right variable winning device 650a). As a result, the player can decide whether to perform right-handed or left-handed by making the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side different between the case of right-handed hit and the case of left-handed hit. It has realized the playability that can be selected by the player, but the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed is not limited to this. For example, if the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), the entry of the game ball is detected at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when hitting left (for example, it is difficult to enter the ball when hitting right). Many prize balls are given when the ball is hit (for example, 15 per hit), and a specific prize opening is provided so that the game ball can easily enter when hitting right (difficult to hit when hitting left). A specific winning opening may be provided at a position where the opening time is long (for example, up to 5 seconds) but the number of prize balls given is small (for example, 3 per entry). Then, the specific winning openings to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds may be extremely shortened (for example, 0.1 seconds). With this configuration, if you continue to hit left during the big hit, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening tends to decrease, but it is given when you enter the specific winning opening. It is possible to realize playability in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right during the big hit, it is easier for more game balls to enter the specific winning opening, but less prize balls will be given when you enter the specific winning opening. Sex can be realized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select the desired playability and play the game. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where it is easy for a game ball to enter when hitting left (it is difficult to enter when hitting right), and a game ball enters when hitting right. The right variable winning device 650 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to enter the ball when hitting left), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period when the right variable winning device 650 is opened in one jackpot. It may be configured to be shorter than the above period. That is, if one continues to hit right at the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the right specific winning opening 650a and a probable change state will be given after the jackpot, but the number of prize balls obtained will be reduced. If you continue to hit left, you will be able to win a large number of prize balls by entering many game balls into the specific winning opening 65a, but it will be difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in this configuration, the superiority can be different for each firing direction during the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device in which only a winning ball is given to a winning ball) and a right variable winning device 650 (a winning ball is given to a winning ball and a probable change state). The positional relationship with the variable winning device (which is also given) may be reversed. Further, it is not limited to the first round of the jackpot to set the surface (element) in which the right-handed is more advantageous and the surface (element) in which the left-handed is more advantageous. For example, in a normal game, an element in which a left-handed hit is more advantageous than a right-handed hit and an element in which a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a left-handed hit may be provided. More specifically, for example, a left-handed ball opening for a left-handed game ball and a right-handed right-handed ball for a right-handed game ball are provided. When a game ball enters any of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. Then, in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, playing a game aiming at the right entrance with a right-handed hit is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than a left-handed hit, while a left-handed hit is an aspect of game efficiency. It is more disadvantageous than right-handed, but if you win a big hit, you can easily select a jackpot type that is more advantageous than right-handed (the number of rounds or the type that is advantageous in terms of the continuation rate of the advantageous state). good.

In the sixth embodiment, when a right-handed hit is made in a predetermined period (first round) of the jackpot, the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650a is specified to the right as compared with the case where the left-handed hit is made. While the configuration is such that it is easy to enter the winning opening 650a, when a left-handed hit is made, more game balls are more likely to reach the right variable winning device 650a than when a right-handed hit is made. It was composed. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the launch direction of the game ball in the first round of the jackpot. Then, the corresponding effect may be executed according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left-handed hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 82) is such that the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned off. When right-handed hitting is detected, the display area HR3 may be turned on and the display area HR2 may be turned off so that the display mode looks like it is turned off. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the playability selected by the accident.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is opened by sliding to the left in the front view, so that the game is rolled from the right side with respect to the right variable winning device 650. The ball is configured so that the ball can enter for a longer period of time than the game ball that has rolled from the left side, but the shape and operation content of the opening / closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing door 650f1 may be configured to be opened from the front side to the back side of the front view. Then, the length of the opening / closing door 650f1 on the right front side of the front view may be set to be shorter than the length of one game ball or more on the left front side of the front view. That is, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is stored in the back side of the front view, the game ball can enter the right side of the opening / closing door 650f1 earlier than the left side, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. May be configured so that when the opening / closing door 650f1 protrudes forward in front of the opening / closing door 650f1, the left side of the opening / closing door 650f1 is in a state where the game ball can be paid in earlier. Even in this configuration, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the game ball that has rolled from the right side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 enters the ball more than the game ball that has rolled from the left side. It can be configured to allow for a longer period of time.

In the sixth embodiment, a surface in which left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than right-handed hitting depending on the board surface configuration (that is, a game ball reaching the right variable winning device 650 enters the right specific winning opening 650a). The configuration is such that right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 in one round). It is not limited. For example, it may be realized in a controlled manner. More specifically, for example, the right specific winning opening 650a is provided at a position where the arrival rate of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the ball is hit right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured so that it is possible to detect whether the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit, and it is detected that the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit. The opening pattern may be different from that of the case where the opening pattern is used. That is, when right-handed hitting is detected, the right-handed specific winning opening 650a is opened less frequently, but the right-handed specific winning opening 650a is opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while left-handed hitting is detected. In this case, the right specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a relatively short opening pattern while the right specific winning opening 650a is opened relatively many times. Further, the player may be allowed to select the game property of the jackpot by operating an operating means such as a button instead of the firing direction of the game ball.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. In the fifth embodiment described above, all the game balls launched by right-handed hitting pass through the detour accessory 700. That is, when a right-handed hit is made, it always takes 7 to 8 seconds to flow down to the lower area (the area where the first entry port 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided) on the game board 13. Was supposed to be. That is, in a normal game state other than during the execution of the jackpot game, if a right-handed hit is performed, the game efficiency is deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and when one of the flow paths flows down, the detour accessory 700 passes through the same as in the fifth embodiment. The game ball flows down to the variable winning device 65, whereas when it flows down the other flow path, the ball is avoided from entering the detour accessory 700, and it becomes difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is said. That is, a flow path in which the period until the game ball enters one of the entry ports (first entry opening 64, specific winning opening 65, out opening 66, general winning opening 63, etc.) is relatively long. Two types, a flow path and a flow path in which the period until the ball enters one of the entrances, is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. As a result, the game playability differs depending on the launch direction of the game ball during the jackpot (some waste balls may occur, but the game playability that allows the jackpot to be digested early and the waste balls are unlikely to occur. , It is possible to select a game property that prolongs the digestion period of the jackpot), and it is possible to prevent deterioration of the game efficiency when the game is played by right-handed hitting.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 110 is provided in the main control device 110. The configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Is. The fifth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 90, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, the game ball can flow down on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and on the left side of the front view with respect to the detour accessory 700. It differs from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a flow path is provided. Further, the difference is that the electric accessory 64a provided attached to the first ball entry port 64 has been deleted. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the description, the flow path provided with the detour accessory 700 will be referred to as a right first flow path, and will be referred to as a front view right side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 and with respect to the detour accessory 700. The flow path provided on the left side of the front view is referred to as a right second flow path.

As shown in FIG. 90, a normal entry port (through gate) 67 through which the game ball can pass is provided above the right second flow path, and the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67. As a result, a lottery of ordinary symbols is executed as in the fifth embodiment and the like. As shown in FIG. 90, the character "GO" is attached to the normal entry port 67. Below the normal ball entry port 67, a second ball entry port 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second entry port 640, a lottery of a special symbol is executed in the same manner as when the game ball enters the first entry port 64. In addition, a lottery of special symbols (lottery of the first special symbol) executed based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and execution based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), the percentage of winning jackpots is the same regardless of the state (whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the special symbol is in the probabilistic state). It is configured to be. On the other hand, the jackpot type determined when a big hit is made in the special symbol lottery is different depending on whether the big hit is made by the first special symbol lottery or the big hit by the second special symbol lottery. (See FIG. 92 (a)). More specifically, it is easier to determine the type of jackpot with a large number of rounds when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit than when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to give the player greater joy when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit than when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit.

The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a capable of performing an opening operation in the right direction in the front view. While the electric accessory 640a is closed (in a state of standing upright in the vertical direction), the game ball flowing into the right second flow path cannot enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, while the electric accessory 640a is open (in a state of being tilted to the right in the front view), most of the game balls that have flowed into the right second flow path enter the second entrance 640. The ball becomes possible. The electric accessory 640a is variable to the open state under the same conditions as the electric accessory 64a of the fifth embodiment and the like. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, when the lottery of the normal symbol is won, the opening period of "0.2 seconds x 1 time" and the number of times of opening are set, while the normal symbol is set. In the time saving state of, the opening period of "1 second x 2 times" and the number of times of opening are set when the lottery of the normal symbol is won. In addition to this, as in the fifth embodiment and the like, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds, whereas in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. It will be very short. Therefore, if the game method of launching the game ball aiming at the right second flow path in the normal state of the normal symbol is performed, the game ball can hardly be inserted into the second entry port 640 (the game ball is wasted). On the other hand, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the game method of firing the game ball aiming at the right second flow path frequently (the number of fired game balls and the second entry ball) A game ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 (to the extent that the number of prize balls paid out by entering the opening 640 is almost the same). Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), the second right By continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the flow path, it is easy to determine the jackpot type (big hit type with a relatively large number of rounds) that is advantageous in the case of a jackpot. It can be executed continuously without reduction. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, most of the game balls are wasted even if the right second flow path is aimed at, so by launching the game balls aiming at the first entry port 64 by hitting the left. It is necessary to play a game. Even if a big hit is made by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is easy to determine a disadvantageous big hit type (a big hit type with a relatively small number of rounds), and the more you continue to hit left, the less balls you have. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set will be set.

Further, an out port 66 is provided below the second entry port 640. When a game ball enters the out port 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without being awarded a prize ball. With this out port 66, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged in the second right flow path. As shown in FIG. 90, the game is played in the right second flow path until the game ball enters any of the entry ports (second entry port 640 or out port 66). There is almost no configuration that prevents the ball from flowing down (varies the direction of travel or slows down). Therefore, as compared with the first right flow path, the period from the launch of the game ball to the entry of the ball into any of the entry ports is extremely short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, by launching the game ball aiming at the second right flow path, the game can be efficiently performed.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in addition to the right first flow path provided with the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the normal entry port 67 and the second entry port 67 and the second entry port. A second right flow path provided with 640 is provided. The second ball entry port 640 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball (the electric accessory 640a is easy to be opened) during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Can be performed, and right-handed can be performed in the high probability state of a normal symbol. That is, even in the presence of the detour accessory 700, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the direction in which the game ball is launched according to the game state during the normal game (a game state other than the jackpot game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 shows a display mode in a gaming state in which a time saving state of a normal symbol is set (a probabilistic state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a low probability state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol). It is a figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the upper side of the front view in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (above the display area in which the variation display of the third symbol is executed). ), A horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR8 is formed. For this display area HR8, as shown in Fig. 91, "Aim for" GO "by hitting right! !! "And an image imitating a right-pointing arrow are displayed. By these display contents, the player can hit the game ball to the right with the firing intensity (rate of fire) passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 with the letters "GO". It is possible to easily understand that a game ball can also be inserted into the second entry port 640.

In the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball with a firing intensity of 85% to 100% (that is, by rotating the operating handle 51 to a position of 85% to 100% of the movable range), the right side is obtained. The game ball can flow into the first flow path, and by firing the game ball with a firing intensity of 60% to 90% (that is, it is rotated to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range of the operation handle 51). As a result), the game ball can flow into the second right flow path. Here, when the game ball is launched in the range of the firing intensity of 85% to 90%, it can flow into the right first flow path or the right second flow path depending on the repulsive direction of the game ball or the like. There is sex. Further, when the game ball is launched with a firing intensity of 60% to 65%, it may flow into the right second flow path and may flow into the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80. .. On the other hand, when the game ball is launched within the range of the firing intensity of 91% to 100%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the first right flow path. Further, when the game ball is launched within the range of the firing intensity of 66% to 84%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the second right flow path. When the game ball is launched with a firing intensity of 25% to 59%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, when the game ball is launched with a firing intensity of less than 25%, the return ball prevention member 68 cannot be exceeded, so that the game ball is not launched into the game area.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is the first type selection with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9A). The provisions of Table 202b are only partially changed. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, the lottery when the big hit is won is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are specified depending on the existence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", as the jackpot type. "Big hit A7" is defined in association with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 92 (a)). This "big hit A7" has 16 rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit A7" are 5 of "0-4", so the first The rate (probability) at which "big hit A7" is determined when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit B7". Is specified in association with each other (see 202b2 in FIG. 92 (a)). This "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is eight, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, although the number of rounds is smaller than that of "big hit A7", the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the most advantageous gaming state, so it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit B7" are 55 of "5 to 59", so that is the first. The rate (probability) that "big hit B7" is determined when a big hit is made in a special symbol lottery is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, when the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C7". Is specified in association with each other (see 202b3 in FIG. 92 (a)). This "big hit C7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is eight, and the game state after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is also relatively disadvantageous, "big hit C7" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit C7" are 40, which are "60 to 99", so that is the first. The rate (probability) at which "big hit C7" is determined when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbol, when the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 59", the jackpot type is "big hit D7". Is specified in association with each other (see 202b4 in FIG. 92A). This "big hit D7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, like the "big hit A7", it is the big hit type that is most advantageous for the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit D7" are 60, which are "0 to 59". The rate (probability) at which "big hit D7" is determined when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery is 60% (60/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbol, when the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit E7". Is specified in association with each other (see 202b5 in FIG. 92 (a)). This "big hit E7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the big hit is set to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, although the number of rounds is the largest, the gaming state after the jackpot is a jackpot type that is set to a relatively disadvantageous gaming state. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter values (random values) associated with the "big hit E7" are 40, which are "60 to 99". The rate (probability) at which "big hit E7" is determined when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery is 40% (40/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, either of the big hits (big hit B7 and big hit C7) of 8 rounds (relatively small number of rounds) at a rate of 95%. Is determined, and the jackpot (big hit A7) of 16 rounds (relatively large number of rounds) is determined only at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot (either jackpot D7 or jackpot E7) of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) is determined at a rate of 100%. There is. As a result, it is easier to determine the number of rounds when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit than when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. In that case, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

The method of making the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous than the jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the rate at which the jackpot type that becomes the probable change state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is determined so that the jackpot by the second special symbol lottery is higher. good. Further, for example, as the number of time reductions in the case of a normal jackpot, the number of time reductions in which the number of jackpots of the second special symbol is larger may be easily selected.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). FIG. 92B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 8) of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Instead of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the first special symbol holding ball The difference is that the number counter 203c1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 is This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 have the same configurations as the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. There is. That is, it has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value of is stored. When a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted to the execution area (see FIG. 11) (see FIG. 11). Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the hold first area of the above are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area are each. Based on the above, a judgment such as a lottery of special symbols is made. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters the second entry port 640. The maximum number of reserved balls (number of waits) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the (starting prize) is 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. It is added by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is up to 4. It is added by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. First, the special symbol variation processing 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. This special symbol variation process 8 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, as in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22) The same processes as those of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S202 that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the number of second special symbol reserved balls is determined. The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol is reserved. Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the ball count counter 203c2 (S223), and set the special figure 2 hold ball count command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203c2 after the update (S224). .. The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203a2 is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process shifts to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S222: No). Then, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is greater than 0. (S227).

In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S227: No), the first Since neither the reserved ball of the 1 special symbol nor the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol exists, which means that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be newly started, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 (S228), and set the special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 (S228). S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 29). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901).

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is performed. Move to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the start winning process 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This start winning process 8 (S122) is a process executed in place of the start winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). This is a process for executing the corresponding control when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640.

In the start winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol). Acquires the number of holdings N1) of the variable display to be performed (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the processing of S421, when it is determined that the first entry port 64 has not been won (S421: No), or even if the game ball has been won in the first entry opening 64, the processing of S423 When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process shifts to S427. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S421: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is added by 1 (S424). Then, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as an external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later. Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203c1 from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 hold ball number command by the process of S425, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the process is performed in S427. Move to. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S427). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entry port 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (for the lottery of the second special symbol). The corresponding variation display hold count N2) is acquired (S428), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol hold ball counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). S429).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S427: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, the special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 hold ball number command by the processing of S431, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) described above. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. Transition. In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, a pre-reading process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S433), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 95.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S433). In this look-ahead processing (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 in the starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 94). If it is determined that a new ball has not been detected (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S1502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time when the ball entry is detected (starting winning process 8 (FIG. 94)). Based on (see) S426 or various counter values stored in the process of S432), whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is successful (whether or not it is a big hit), its stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and its Predict the fluctuation pattern (S1503).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S1503, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S1504), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the period until the passing game ball enters one of the entrances on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the area below the game board 13). (Period until reaching) is relatively long (it takes 7 to 8 seconds), and the period until the passing game ball enters one of the entrances is relatively short. It is configured to provide two flow paths, one is the second right flow path (about 1 second). By launching the game ball aiming at the first right flow path in the jackpot, the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a becomes longer (that is, until the jackpot ends), as in the fifth embodiment described above. However, the game ball can be entered (winned) in the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate than when the game ball is launched aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by hitting the left side.

Further, when the game ball is launched toward the right second flow path, the possibility of entering the specific winning opening 65a is almost 0, but the possibility of entering the second winning opening 640 is relatively short (1 second). It can be reached by (degree). Therefore, in a high-probability state of a normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened, the game ball is continuously launched toward the right second flow path (66% to 84%). By hitting right with the firing intensity), the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously performed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. On the other hand, if a left-handed hit is made, the possibility of entering the second entrance 640 is almost zero, but it is possible to enter the first entrance 64 and also the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Further, in a shorter period (about 1 to 2 seconds) than when the game ball is launched toward the right first flow path, the area below the game board 13 (the first ball entry port 64 and the specific winning opening 65) The game ball can reach the provided area). Therefore, a player who wants to finish the jackpot in a short period of time (wants to win many prize balls in a short period of time) can be made to hit left. Further, even in a normal state of a normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be released, the game can be performed with the aim of allowing the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 by left-handed striking. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows can be changed according to the game state, the player's taste, and the like. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of hitting the launch direction of the game ball, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is configured to enter either the second entry port 640 or the out port 66, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path may be configured to be able to reach the first entry port 64, the specific winning opening 65, or the like. On the contrary, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the first right flow path may be configured to reach the second entry port 640.

In the seventh embodiment, the right first flow path, which is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a and is difficult to enter the second entry opening 640, and the second entry opening, which is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a. The right second flow path, which makes it easy to enter the 640, is provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path can enter the first entry port 64, and the winning rate to the specific winning opening 65a is lower than that when it flows down the right first flow path. It may be configured to be. With this configuration, the game ball moves to the first entrance 64 regardless of whether the game is played by hitting the left side or aiming at the second right flow path by hitting the right side. Since it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball can be fired in the player's favorite firing direction during the normal game. Further, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, the left first flow path, which is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a and is difficult to enter the first entry opening 64, and the left first flow path are more specific winning than the left first flow path. The left second flow path, which is difficult to enter the mouth 65a and is easier to enter the first ball entry port 64 than the left first flow path, may be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, an effect (see FIG. 91) suggesting that the game ball is launched aiming at the normal entry port 67 is executed. However, in addition to this, when the player is hitting left even though the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (for example, it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entry port 64). If this is the case), an effect (warning effect) in which the game ball is more strongly requested to be launched at the normal entry port 67 may be executed. Similarly, when it is detected that the player is hitting right in the normal state of the normal symbol (for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67), the ball is hit left. It may be configured to execute an effect (warning effect) in a strongly requested manner. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing the game with the game ball being launched in the wrong direction and causing the player to lose money.

<First modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, various modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. First, a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the first right flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is long. board. Further, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, while it is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, in the first modification, both the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path can reach the specific winning opening 65a. Further, as will be described in detail later, by continuously hitting the right while the jackpot game is being executed, the game ball that has flowed down the first right flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the second right flow path can be played. It is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. As a result, during the execution of the jackpot game, two game balls are won (winning) for the specific winning opening 65a, so that the maximum number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65a is exceeded in each round. It becomes easy to win a prize. More specifically, as described above, in each round of jackpots, when the tenth prize for the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined that the end condition of the round is satisfied and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. .. Under this circumstance, if two game balls reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time while nine game balls have already won the specific winning opening 65a, the tenth winning is detected and then the specific winning is specified. By the time the mouth 65a is closed, the eleventh game ball that has arrived almost at the same time as the tenth game ball can also be made to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in one round, it is relatively easy to obtain a prize ball for 11 prizes (a prize ball for a prize more than a specified number of times). Therefore, since the prize ball can be obtained beyond the original jackpot specifications of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 in the first modification, the right first flow path (the flow path formed on the rightmost side in the game board 13) is a detour accessory according to the seventh embodiment. Instead of 700, a plurality of nails are provided. With these plurality of nails, the flow direction of the game ball can be switched a plurality of times. On the other hand, the right second flow path (the flow path formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the right first flow path) hinders the flow of the game ball as compared with the right first flow path. There are few structures (to decelerate). Therefore, in the case of flowing down the right second flow path, in the case of flowing down the right first flow path, the lower region (first ball entrance 64 or variable) in the game board 13 after the game ball is launched. The period until reaching the area where the winning device 65 is arranged) is shortened. More specifically, the period from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the variable winning device 65 is 0 in the case of flowing down the second flow path than in the case of flowing down the first flow path. It will be shortened by about 6 seconds.

Further, above the right first flow path and the right second flow path, a distribution member 850 for distributing the game ball to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path is provided. The game ball launched by right-handed strike always reaches this distribution member 850, and is distributed to either flow path (either the right first flow path or the right second flow path) by the distribution member 850. Be done. As shown in FIG. 96, the distribution member 850 has two holding portions 850a and 850b that can receive and temporarily hold the game ball that has flowed down. The distribution member 850 is basically in a state in which either the holding portion 850a or 850b faces upward and stands still, and the game ball launched by right-handed hitting is received by the holding portion facing upward. FIG. 96 illustrates a situation in which a game ball launched by a right-handed hit is received while the holding portion 850a faces upward and stands still.

When the game ball is received by either the holding portion 850a or 850b, gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As a result, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise with the rotation shaft 850c as the rotation axis, and the holding portion 850b is in a state of facing upward. In this state, since the holding portion 850a forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower left direction, the game ball held by the holding portion 850a falls in the lower left direction in the front view. That is, it flows down the second right flow path. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 850c, and the holding portion 850a faces upward. In this state, since the holding portion 850b forms an inclination in the downward direction in the lower right direction, the game ball held by the holding portion 850b falls in the lower right direction in the front view. That is, it flows down the first right flow path. Therefore, the distribution member 850 is in a state in which different holding portions face upward each time the game ball is distributed to any of the flow paths. Therefore, every time the game ball reaches the distribution member 650, the game ball can be alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As described above, the time required to reach the variable winning device 65 is shorter by flowing down the right second flow path than by flowing down the right first flow path. Then, as described above, the firing interval of the game ball is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, when right-handed is continuously performed, one game ball distributed to the right first flow path and a game ball launched next to the one game ball and distributed to the right second flow path are generated. , The variable winning device 65 is reached almost at the same time, and the specific winning opening 65a is won at almost the same time. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, nine game balls have already won the specific winning opening 65a (the specific winning opening 65a is closed when one more winning is detected), and the first flow on the right. When two game balls flowing down the road and the second right flow path reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time, 11 game balls can be entered in one round. That is, simply by continuously hitting the right side, the game ball easily exceeds the maximum number of winnings of 10 in each round of big hits (the number of winnings that is the end condition of the round) and enters the specific winning opening 65a. It can be made into a ball (so-called over-winning is generated). Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

In the first modification, the game ball is alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path by the distribution member 850 just by continuously hitting the game ball to the right. It is not limited to this. The distribution member 850 may be deleted and the player may adjust the firing intensity to aim for over-winning. In this case, when the number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65 is 9 (the number of winnings is 1 less than the specified number) in each round, first, the game ball is launched aiming at the first right flow path, and then the game ball is continuously fired. By launching the game ball aiming at the right second flow path, the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. be able to. That is, the eleventh game ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a between the time when the winning of the tenth game ball is detected and the time when the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Therefore, as compared with the first modification described above, a technique for quickly switching the firing direction is required, but for a player who accurately switches the firing direction, over-winning can be generated more reliably. That is, in the above-described first modification, if the tenth game ball is not distributed to the right first flow path in one round, over-winning does not occur. That is, whether or not it is easy to win an over prize differs depending on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round. On the other hand, when the distribution member 850 is deleted, if the player has the technique of switching the firing direction, the tenth and eleventh game balls are always placed in the right first flow path and the right second flow path. Since it can flow down to the flow path, over-winning can be generated more reliably.

<Second modification in the seventh embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In the seventh embodiment described above, when the game ball flows down the first right flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is long. board. Further, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, while it is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, in the second modification, as the variable winning device in which the winning ball is given when the game ball enters during the jackpot, the variable winning device 6500 is replaced with the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment. Is provided at a position where a game ball launched by hitting left cannot enter. The variable winning device 6500 is configured so that a game ball flowing down the first right flow path and a game ball flowing down the second right flow path can enter the ball. The right first flow path is configured so that the period until reaching the variable winning device 6500 is longer than that of the right second flow path, and while the variable winning device 6500 is open. , It is configured so that the rate of entering the specific winning opening 6500a is high. As a result, in the jackpot, it is possible to realize different game characteristics between the case where the game ball is launched aiming at the right first flow path and the case where the game ball is launched aiming at the right second flow path. That is, by continuously firing the game ball aiming at the right first flow path, the execution period of the jackpot game becomes longer, but the game becomes less likely to generate wasted balls, while aiming at the right second flow path. By continuing to fire the game ball, the execution period of the jackpot game is shortened, but the game becomes a game in which a waste ball can occur.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 97, in the second modification, the variable winning device 65 is deleted from the game board 13 (see FIG. 90) in the seventh embodiment, and the lower part of the right second flow path. However, it differs only in that it is connected to the lower region of the game board 13 and that the variable winning device 6500 is provided between the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 is awarded a prize ball each time it detects that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 6500a where the ball can be entered. The variable winning device 6500 is additionally provided with a pair of electric accessory 6500a1 and 6500a2 capable of preventing the game ball from entering the ball. The electric accessories 6500a1 and 6500a2 are normally closed so that the ball cannot enter the specific winning opening 6500a, and in each round of the jackpot, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or a game ball) Is released (until 10 balls are inserted).

Further, as shown in FIG. 97, by opening the electric accessory 6500a1 provided on the right first flow path side, the lower end of the induction flow path (induction flow path 780) of 1 inside the detour accessory 700 is opened. And the tip of the electric accessory 6500a1 come close to each other. That is, as a result of making it impossible for the game ball to pass between the guidance flow path 780 and the electric accessory 6500a1, the game ball flowing down the guidance flow path 780 will almost certainly win the specific winning opening 6500a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 6500a2 provided on the right second flow path side is opened, a gap of one game ball or more is left on the left side of the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the second right flow path is guided by the open electric accessory 6500a2 and easily enters the specific winning opening 6500a, but is easier than the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a2. There is a possibility that it will pass through the left side and flow down to the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first entry port 64 and the out port 66 are provided).

As described above, in the second modification of the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is launched toward the right second flow path, the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 6500a. If the game ball is continuously fired toward the first right flow path during the jackpot, it takes a long time for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 6500 (the execution period of the jackpot game is long). Almost all the game balls reached while the specific winning opening 6500a is open can be entered into the specific winning opening 6500a. On the other hand, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the second right flow path during the jackpot, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is short (the jackpot game can be completed in a short period of time). However, there is a risk that some of the game balls (for example, 1 in 10 balls) will not enter the specific winning opening 6500a but will enter the out opening 66. .. Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to reduce waste balls (game balls that enter the out opening 66 without entering the specific winning opening 6500a) instead of lengthening the jackpot period. It is possible to let the player select the playability that can be achieved and the playability that the number of wasted balls is relatively large at the cost of speedily digesting the jackpot.

<Third variant of the seventh embodiment>
Next, a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. In the seventh embodiment described above, the detour accessory 700 provided in the right first flow path is configured to prolong the period of passing through the right first flow path. As a result, when the game ball flows down the first right flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is extended.

On the other hand, in the third modification, the detour accessory 700 is deleted in the first right flow path, and the width of the flow path is set to be less than two game balls (that is, the detour accessory 700 is provided). The width of the flow path is narrower than that in the case where it is installed). Then, as a configuration for prolonging the period during which the game ball flows down the right first flow path, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are arranged with respect to the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the right first flow path, the ratio of the area of the right first flow path to the area of the board surface of the game board 13 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging nails, wind turbines, etc. on the board surface can be reduced. Can be enhanced.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 98, in the game board 13 in the third modification, the detour accessory 700 is used in the first right flow path with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 90) of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. The difference is that a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided instead, and the width of the right first flow path is narrowed and the width of the right second flow path is widened.

The above-mentioned rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided in the first right flow path. The operation of these three rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described by taking the rotating body 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 is formed in a substantially crescent-shaped shape in which a part of a circle is hollowed out, and can rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the rotating shaft 861b as the rotating axis. It is configured to be possible. Further, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stop portion 861a capable of receiving only one game ball that has flowed down. In a state where the ball stop portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right flow path, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 861 is received by the ball stop portion 861a. Since the ball stop portion 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotation operation of the rotating body 861, the game ball received by the ball stop portion 861a also rotates with the rotation shaft 861b as the rotation axis. Then, when the ball stop portion 861a faces the downstream side in the right first flow path, it falls to the downstream side in the right first flow path due to the gravity acting on the game ball.

On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 in a state where the ball stopping portion 861a does not face the upstream direction in the first right flow path, it comes into contact with the upstream side of the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 861. It becomes a state. The state in which the game ball is in contact with the outer peripheral portion continues until the rotating body 861 rotates so that the ball stop portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right flow path. When the ball stop portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the first right flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stop portion 861a, and thereafter, as described above, the rotation shaft is linked to the rotation operation of the rotating body 861. After performing the rotation operation with the 861b as the rotation axis, the ball falls to the downstream side in the first right flow path.

By providing the rotating bodies 861 to 863 with respect to the first right flow path in this way, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball each time it reaches each rotating body. A game ball that temporarily stops the game ball that has reached each rotating body, causes the ball stop to receive the game ball, and causes a rotating motion around the rotation axis in conjunction with the rotating motion of the rotating body. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period required for the game ball that has reached the right first flow path to completely flow down the right first flow path, as compared with the case where the rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period until the game ball launched toward the right first flow path reaches the lower region of the game board 13 as compared with the game ball launched by left-handed hitting.

As described above, in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, instead of the detour accessory 700, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 having a relatively small installation area are arranged in the right first flow path. There is. Then, by reducing the flow speed of the game ball (preventing the flow) by each of the rotating bodies 861 to 863, until the game ball launched toward the right first flow path reaches the lower region of the game board 13. The period between them is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball launched by the left-handed hit reaches the lower region. As a result, the area occupied by the right first flow path can be reduced while achieving the same playability as in the seventh embodiment described above, so that the degree of freedom in board configuration can be further improved.

In the third modification of the seventh embodiment, three rotating bodies are provided for the right first flow path, but the number and arrangement of the rotating bodies are the same as those of the third modification. It is not limited and can be determined arbitrarily.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be done.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modified examples thereof, the flow path having the detour accessory 700 is arranged on the right side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, but the board surface configuration can be arbitrarily changed. can do. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be arranged on the left side of the variable display device unit 890.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modified examples thereof, each guide flow path 740 to 790 of the detour accessory 700 is configured to protrude toward the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is not limited to this. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be provided on the back side of the base plate 60. That is, by arranging the detour accessory 700 on the back side of the base plate 60 and configuring the front side of the detour accessory 700 of the base plate 60 with at least a transparent material, it is possible to visually check the flow state of the game ball. do. Then, of the base plate 60, the upstream side of the detour accessory 700 (the position where the game ball that has advanced to the back side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710) and the downstream side (outflow from the opening 720). An opening having a size that penetrates the base plate 60 and allows the game ball to pass through may be provided at a position (a position where the game ball can flow out to the front side of the base plate 60). With this configuration, nails, wind turbines, and the like can be arranged on the front side of the detour accessory 700 in the base plate 60. That is, the board surface of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the result of pre-reading the success / failure and the fluctuation pattern (variation type), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to these, the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed may be executed based on the jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot when a big hit occurs from the presence or absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect, so that the player's interest in the continuous advance notice effect can be improved. Can be done.

In each of the above embodiments, the more highly expected the lottery result is, the easier it is for the continuous advance notice effect to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result with a lower degree of expectation may be configured so that the continuous notice effect is more likely to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed with the expectation that the continuous advance notice effect will not be executed. Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the variable display accompanied by the advance notice effect is continuously executed over the plurality of variable displays, but a plurality of consecutive variable displays are necessarily executed. It is not necessary to execute the advance notice effect over the variable display. For example, at the start of each variable display in which the continuous notice effect is set, a lottery may be made as to whether or not to set the notice effect. Further, in this case, the higher the expectation of the winning information that triggered the setting of the continuous advance notice effect, the higher the lottery probability of setting the advance notice effect in each variation display may be configured. With such a configuration, the more the advance notice effect is continued, the higher the expectation for the big hit can be raised, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a are not determined one by one, but the logical sum data (first embodiment). The feasibility of executing the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the data indicating the contents of the reserved lottery results such as (form), points (second embodiment), and value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment). Although it was composed, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to discriminate one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a one by one. Further, in each of the above embodiments, only when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment), and the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment). The configuration was such that whether or not the continuous advance notice effect could be executed was determined based on the data indicating the content of the reserved lottery result such as (form), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect that is normally executed is not limited to this. In some or all of the determination of approval or disapproval, the determination may be made based on the data indicating the contents of the reserved lottery result. On the contrary, in a state other than the advance notice lottery prohibition state (normal state), it is always determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based only on the lottery result notified by the winning information command (random number range command). May be.

In each of the above embodiments, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, but the setting timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state is not limited to this, and may be arbitrary. You may decide. Specifically, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set only when it is finally decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect that will be a big hit. That is, the continuous advance notice effect may be overwritten while the continuous advance notice effect is being executed. With this configuration, the frequency of execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the jackpot, or the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the probability change state of the special symbol or the time reduction state of the normal symbol. May be good. Further, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state by lottery every time the fluctuation start timing is reached. For example, an operation means that can be operated by the player may be provided for the operation means. The setting and cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be switched according to the operation content. Similarly, the timing at which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released is not limited to the timing at which one normal variable display ends after the continuous advance notice effect ends, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may not be released from the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of the five variable displays, or conversely, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released when the continuous advance notice effect ends. You may. Alternatively, it may be canceled at a predetermined timing during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, or may be released regardless of the continuous advance notice effect. For example, it may be canceled based on the end of a jackpot, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc., or while the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, whether or not to cancel by lottery each time the variable display is executed. It may be configured to discriminate. Further, it may be configured so that it can be released based on the operation of the player. Further, it is not necessary to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the start winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the main control device 110 may determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the determination result. In this case, information indicating whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is a set variation pattern may be included in the variation pattern command and transmitted, or may be transmitted by another command. Further, it may be configured that only the determination to execute the continuous advance notice effect is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the period during which the continuous notice effect continues is grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 side. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set only from the time when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined to the end of the continuous advance notice effect and the end of one variable display. , Not limited to this. For example, even if a big hit occurs, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, and data (logical sum data (first embodiment), points (second embodiment) indicating the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball held at that time are released. The configuration may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on (the embodiment) or the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment)). Here, during the jackpot, the player shoots a ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a, so that the jackpot also hits the first entry opening 64 (see FIG. 2) provided vertically above the specific winning opening 65a. There is a high possibility that multiple balls will enter inside. That is, there is a high possibility that a plurality of reserved balls will increase between the start and the end of the jackpot. Under this circumstance, if the configuration is such that the feasibility of executing the continuous advance notice effect is determined every time the start prize for the first ball opening 64 generated during the jackpot is detected, the start prize corresponding to the variation type with low expectation is obtained first. After the continuous advance notice production is determined based on the above and the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, there is a possibility that a start prize corresponding to a variable type with a high degree of expectation will occur. That is, even though the holding ball corresponding to the fluctuation type with high expectation exists in the hold, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation type with high expectation. There is a risk that it will disappear. On the other hand, during the jackpot, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled at the end of the jackpot, and the continuous advance notice effect is produced based on the lottery result of each reserved ball held at that time. If the configuration is set to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on the reserved ball of the variable type with the highest expectation among the reserved balls held at the end of the jackpot. can. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect can be set more preferably.

In each of the above embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, an example in which the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed according to the fluctuation type of the plurality of reserved balls has been described. It is not limited to the judgment of. For example, the techniques of the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called gaming machine equipped with a holding notice effect) configured so that the mode of the reserved symbol can be changed to a mode different from the usual mode. .. That is, a prohibited state in which changing the mode of the reserved symbol is prohibited is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the execution of the reserved notice effect is decided or when the jackpot is started). When the prohibited state is lifted, the fluctuation types of the plurality of reserved balls held at the time of the cancellation are determined, and the hold notice can be executed or not with the lottery probability according to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation. It may be configured to determine the mode of the pending symbol when executing the pending notice. Further, the technique of each of the above embodiments is not limited to the case of determining the variation type of the reserved ball in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the hold advance notice effect, and the like. When performing some determination on a plurality of reserved balls, the techniques of each of the above embodiments can be applied.

In each of the above embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed according to the variation type of the plurality of reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, every time a start prize is detected without setting the advance notice lottery prohibition state, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed according to the fluctuation type of each reserved ball held at that time (continuous advance notice effect is being executed). If so, the configuration may be such that the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be extended) is executed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the control depending on whether or not the advance notice lottery is prohibited, so that the description content of the control program can be simplified. Therefore, the development load of the developer can be reduced.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof. More specifically, for example, the range of values to which various counter values (random values) in the second embodiment belong is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 side. A series of controls for performing look-ahead processing based on a range of values to which various counter values (random values) belong may be applied to the first embodiment and the third embodiment.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Feature A group> (When the read-ahead prohibition state is canceled, all holds are read ahead)
In a game machine including a main control means for executing main control related to a game and a subordinate control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means. A first output means that outputs a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means. The slave control means includes a second output means capable of outputting the discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. Is a signal receiving means configured to at least be able to receive the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the discrimination information signal is received by the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal and the signal receiving means. Based on the above, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A specific discrimination means capable of executing a specific discrimination based on information corresponding to a plurality of the discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means and a discrimination by the specific discrimination means when the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the result of the second determination, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. A game machine A1 characterized by being provided.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the interest of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of interest effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the same system of production is executed (so-called continuous advance notice production is executed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, so that the conventional game machine can be continuously produced a plurality of times. There are also things that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the variable display that is executed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous advance notice effect, the execution determination of the continuous advance notice effect may be won again, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed in duplicate. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous advance notice production should have a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the player is notified by the privilege game executing means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means executed based on the establishment of the discriminating condition in the main control means results in the first discriminating result. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is the first before the discrimination condition is satisfied. 2 It is output to the slave control means by the output means. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect execution means executes the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means at least the corresponding discrimination result signal up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. Until then, it is stored by information storage means. When the specific condition is satisfied, the specific discrimination means executes a specific discrimination based on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, and the discrimination by the specific discrimination means results in the second discrimination. Based on the above, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination.

As a result, the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

At the time of reception, when the gaming machine A1 determines whether to execute the second effect based on the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, triggered by the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means. A gaming machine A2 comprising a discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the second effect is performed based on the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal. Since it is determined by the receiving determination means whether or not to execute the second effect, the chances of the second effect being executed can be increased, which has the effect of further diversifying the effect.

In the gaming machine A2, when the second effect execution means is determined to execute the second effect by the reception time determination means, the first effect corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the second effect is executed over an execution period of a plurality of the first effects including at least.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when it is determined that the second effect is to be executed by the receiving discrimination means, the first effect corresponding to the discrimination information signal that triggered the determination is performed. Since the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means over at least a plurality of execution periods of the first effect, there is an effect that the effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the discriminant limiting state in which the discriminating by the receiving discriminating means is restricted is set based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the discriminating limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means. When is set, the specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined cancellation condition, and the release means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of the predetermined cancellation condition. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a discrimination limiting state in which discrimination by the receiving discrimination means is restricted is set by the limiting state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. When the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means, the discrimination restriction state is released by the release means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition. When a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied, a specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, the discrimination by the specific discrimination means can be executed based on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination result signals already stored in the information storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not the execution of the above is possible based on the information corresponding to more discrimination result signals.

In the gaming machine A4, the limiting state setting means sets the discrimination limiting state based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the receiving discrimination means. ..

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A4, the discrimination limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the receiving discrimination means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution of the second effect from being duplicated and discriminated by the reception time discriminating means during the execution of the two effects.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the predetermined release condition is satisfied based on the execution of at least one of the first effects after the end of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied based on the execution of at least one first effect after the second effect is completed, so that the second effect is satisfied. When at least one of the first effects is executed during the execution of and after the second effect is completed, it is possible to limit the determination of whether to execute the second effect. Therefore, since the first effect without the second effect can be executed at least once from the end of the second effect to the start of the second effect, any of the second effects can be executed. It is possible to easily make the player understand whether or not the first production has been continued. Therefore, there is an effect that a more understandable effect can be realized.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the specific discrimination means includes information corresponding to the first discrimination result in the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the case where the information is provided is higher than the case where the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is included in the information corresponding to the discrimination information signal stored in the information storage means. Since the discrimination by the specific discrimination means is executed so that the ratio of the second discrimination result is higher in the case where the information is included than in the case where the information corresponding to the first discrimination result is not included. When the second effect is executed, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that the privilege game will be executed.

<Characteristic B group> (The type of variation held is determined from the OR data of each holding area)
In a game machine including a main control means for executing main control related to a game and a subordinate control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means. A first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means to the slave control means, a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means. The slave control means includes a second output means capable of outputting the discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. Is a signal receiving means configured to at least be able to receive the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the discrimination information signal is received by the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal and the signal receiving means. Based on this, information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal can be stored at least until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. A calculation data calculation means that calculates predetermined calculation data by performing a predetermined calculation on information corresponding to a plurality of the discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means when the means and a specific condition are satisfied. The second effect execution discriminating means for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, and the second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect. A second effect executing means for executing the second effect over an execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination based on the determination that the effect is to be executed is provided. A game machine B1 characterized by this.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the interest of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of interest effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the same system of production is executed (so-called continuous advance notice production is executed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, so that the conventional game machine can be continuously produced a plurality of times. There are also things that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the variable display that is executed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous advance notice effect, the execution determination of the continuous advance notice effect may be won again, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed in duplicate. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous advance notice production should have a sense of expectation. Further, in order to solve this, when one continuous advance notice effect is determined, a method of limiting the determination of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is conceivable until the continuous advance notice effect is completed. In this case, since the continuous advance notice effect cannot be executed for the reserved ball based on the start winning prize detected during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the next continuous advance notice effect is executed after the continuous advance notice effect of 1 is completed. In some cases, there was a relatively long period of time before it was done. Further, based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls held during the continuous advance notice effect, it is conceivable to determine whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. Since it is necessary to determine the lottery result of the reserved ball, there is a problem that the processing load increases as compared with the determination of whether or not the normal continuous advance notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, the privilege game is executed in favor of the player by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. .. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information satisfies the discrimination condition by the second output means. It is output to the control means before. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect execution means executes the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means at least the corresponding discrimination result signal up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. It is stored by information storage means until it is reached. When the specific condition is satisfied, the calculation data calculation means performs a predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means, and the predetermined calculation data is calculated. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, it is determined whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determination means. Based on the determination by the second effect execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect execution means extends over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination. The second production is executed.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing a predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals. Therefore, the information storage means. The processing load of the slave control means is reduced as compared with the case where all the information stored in is discriminated one by one and the determination of whether to execute the second effect is executed based on each discriminant result. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine B1, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, a predetermined specification is provided in the information corresponding to the plurality of the discrimination information signals that are the targets of the predetermined calculation. The second effect execution discriminating means includes the information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the information corresponding to the discriminating information is included, and the second effect execution discriminating means includes the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information by the information discriminating means. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, when it is determined, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, the information corresponding to the specific discrimination information predetermined in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals that are the targets of the predetermined calculation. Is included or not, it is determined by the information determination means. When it is determined by the information discriminating means that the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information is included, it is determined whether or not the second effect is executed by the second effect execution discriminating means based on the predetermined calculation data.

As a result, the opportunity for the second effect execution determination means to execute the determination can be limited to the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, so that the frequency of the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, the predetermined type of specific discrimination information includes the first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result corresponding to the discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. Discrimination information is provided at least, and the second effect execution discriminating means is provided with the first discriminating information rather than being discriminated by the information discriminating means as including the second discriminating information. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is executed at a higher rate when it is determined to be included.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a predetermined type of specific discrimination information, at least the first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and the second discrimination information corresponding to the discrimination result different from the first discrimination result are provided. ing. When it is determined that the first determination information is included, the second effect execution determination means has a higher proportion of the second than when the information determination means determines that the second determination information is included. It is determined when the production is executed.

As a result, when the second effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the privilege game will be executed as the first determination result.

In the game machine B2 or B3, the main control means identifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, based on the acquisition of the discrimination information by the discrimination information acquisition means. The information storage means includes a pre-identifying means and a discriminating information signal generating means that generates the discriminant information signal by including at least information corresponding to the discriminant result specified by the pre-specified means. A storage area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the specific means is configured to have at least the predetermined number of pieces of information, and the slave control means is configured by the signal receiving means. Bit setting for setting a bit corresponding to a discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal in a specific state in one storage area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal. The calculation data calculation means includes means, and calculates the logical sum of information corresponding to a plurality of the discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means as the predetermined calculation data as the predetermined calculation. The information discriminating means is characterized in that, when a specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state, it is determined that the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information is included. Game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means in the main control means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the prior identification means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. A discrimination information signal including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result specified by the prior identification means is generated by the discrimination information signal generation means. A storage area composed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of a plurality of determination results that can be specified by the prior identification means is provided in the information storage means for at least a predetermined number of pieces of information. In the slave control means, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set as a bit in the storage area of 1 provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means. It is set to a specific state by means. As a predetermined calculation, the logical sum of the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means is calculated as the predetermined calculation data by the calculation data calculation means. When the specific bit of the OR is in a specific state, it is determined by the information determination means that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included.

As a result, it is possible to obtain the same result as discriminating all the information used in the operation of the logical sum only by discriminating the state of a specific bit of the logical sum, so that the processing load of the slave control means can be increased. It has the effect of being able to reduce it.

In the gaming machine B4, the bit setting means sets the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal in the on state and sets the other bits in the off state. ..

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set to the on state by the bit setting means, while the other bits are set to the off state. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination means can be accurately executed.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, a plurality of types having different priorities to be discriminated by the second effect execution discriminating means are set as the types of the specific discriminating information, and the information discriminating means Is to discriminate the bit corresponding to the discriminant result having the highest priority among the bits in the specific state, and the second effect execution discriminating means is the bit discriminated by the discriminating means. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it determines whether or not to execute the second effect at a determination ratio corresponding to.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of types having different priorities to be discriminated by the second effect execution discriminating means are set as the types of the specific discriminating result. Among the bits in the specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result having the highest priority is determined by the information discrimination means. Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determination means at the determination ratio corresponding to the bit determined by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to make the ratio of determination to execute the second effect different according to the determination result by the determination means specified by the prior identification means, so that the determination result by the second effect determination means is executed by the second effect. There is an effect that the player can guess from the presence or absence.

In the gaming machine B6, when discriminating the specific bit, the information discriminating means determines whether or not the specific state is in the order of highest priority from the bit corresponding to the discriminating result having the highest priority. The slave control means is characterized by comprising a discrimination discontinuing means for discontinuing the discrimination by the information discriminating means based on the determination that the information discriminating means is in the specific state. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific bit is discriminated by the information discriminating means, it is discriminated whether the bit corresponding to the discriminating result having the highest priority is in the specific state in descending order of priority. Based on the fact that the information discriminating means determines that the slave control means is in a specific state, the discriminating by the information discriminating means is terminated by the discriminating discontinuing means.

As a result, the discrimination process can be terminated without discriminating all the bits constituting the specific bit, so that there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Specific information indicating the pending content is updated in the sub, and whether or not continuous notice can be executed is determined based on the specific information)
In a game machine including a main control means for executing main control related to a game and a subordinate control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means. A first output means that outputs a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a discrimination information acquisition means that acquires discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means. The slave control means includes a second output means capable of outputting the discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied. Is a signal receiving means configured to at least be able to receive the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination result signal, the specific information storage means for storing the specific information, and the signal receiving means. Based on the discrimination result specifying means for specifying the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal based on the reception of the discrimination information signal, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means. An information updating means capable of updating the specific information, a second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and a second effect thereof. Based on the determination by the effect execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and the interest of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of interest effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the same system of production is executed (so-called continuous advance notice production is executed) over a plurality of variable display execution periods, so that the conventional game machine can be continuously produced a plurality of times. There are also things that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the variable display that is executed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, during the execution of one continuous advance notice effect, the execution determination of the continuous advance notice effect may be won again, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed in duplicate. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variable display in the continuous advance notice production should have a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, in the main control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result of the first determination by the discrimination means. .. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information satisfies the discrimination condition by the second output means. It is output to the control means before. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the fact that the discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect is executed by the first effect executing means according to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination result signal. Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means is specified. The specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information update means based on the above. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, it is determined by the second effect execution determination means whether to execute the second effect, and it is determined that the second effect is executed by the second effect execution determination means. Based on the above, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination.

As a result, the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, so that the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the reception discriminating means for discriminating whether or not to execute the second effect based on the identified discriminating result, triggered by the discriminating result being identified by the discriminating result specifying means, and the first 2. The gaming machine C2 is characterized by comprising a switching means for switching between having the second effect execution determining means perform the determination of whether to execute the effect or the reception determining means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination result is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, it is determined whether or not the reception discrimination means executes the two effects based on the specified discrimination result. The switching means switches whether to let the second effect executing means or the reception discriminating means determine whether to execute the second effect.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in determining whether to execute the second effect.

In the gaming machine C2, the discrimination limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means for setting the discrimination limiting state in which the discrimination by the reception discriminating means is restricted based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and the limiting state setting means. If the case is satisfied, the switching means includes a canceling means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the establishment of the predetermined canceling condition, and the switching means has the second effect based on the fulfillment of the predetermined canceling condition. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the determination as to whether or not to execute is performed by the second effect execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a discrimination limiting state in which discrimination by the reception discrimination means is restricted is set by the limiting state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the discrimination limiting state is set by the limiting state setting means, The determination restriction state is released by the release means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition. Based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, the switching means switches so that the determination as to whether or not to execute the second effect is performed by the second effect execution determining means.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determination means based on the specific information updated during the discrimination restriction state. There is an effect that the discrimination by the second effect execution discriminant means can be performed by adding the discriminant result corresponding to the discriminant information signal received during the discriminant restriction state.

In the gaming machine C3, the switching means receives the determination of whether to execute the second effect based on the determination of whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determining means. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is switched so as to be performed by a discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, it is determined whether to execute the second effect based on the determination of whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determining means. Is switched by the switching means as is performed by the reception discriminating means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to preferably determine whether to execute the second effect.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specific information is updated by the information updating means from the time when the discrimination limiting state is released by the releasing means until the discrimination limiting state is set next by the limiting state setting means. The gaming machine C5, which is provided with an update avoidance means for avoiding being played.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the information is updated from the time when the discrimination limiting state is released by the releasing means until the next setting of the discrimination limiting state by the limiting state setting means. Since the update avoidance means avoids the update of the specific information by the means, it is possible to prevent the specific information from being unnecessarily updated during the period when the determination using the specific information by the second effect executing means is difficult to be executed. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the slave control means stores the specified information defined by associating numerical data with each of the determination results that can be specified by the determination result specifying means. The specific information is provided by the information updating means by performing a predetermined calculation using the numerical data specified in the specified information in association with the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means. The gaming machine C6, which is characterized by updating the above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the specified information defined by associating the numerical data with each determination result that can be specified by the determination result specifying means is stored in the specified information storage means. Using the numerical data defined in association with the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means, the information updating means performs a predetermined operation to update the specific information.

As a result, the specific information can be updated by a simple process of reading the numerical data specified for each discrimination result and performing a predetermined operation, so that the processing load when updating the specific information can be reduced. There is.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores, as the specific information, information indicating the discrimination result of 1 specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the slave control means The priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is specified based on the priority predetermined for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. The information storage means includes a priority determination means for determining whether or not the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storage means, and the information update means is newly added by the priority determination means. When it is determined that the priority corresponding to the determination result specified in is higher, the specific information is updated with the information indicating the newly specified determination result. Game machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the specific information, the information indicating the determination result of 1 specified by the determination result specifying means is stored in the specific information storage means. In the slave control means, the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly specified by the discrimination result specifying means is stored in the specific information based on the priority predetermined for each discrimination result that can be specified by the discrimination result specifying means. The priority determination means determines whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the means. When it is determined by the priority determination means that the priority corresponding to the newly specified determination result is higher, the information update means updates the specific information to the information indicating the newly specified determination result. NS.

As a result, even when the discrimination information signal is output a plurality of times, the specific information storage means has the highest priority of the discrimination result among the plurality of discrimination results notified by the multiple discrimination information signals. Since only the information indicating the result can be stored, there is an effect that it is possible to execute the second effect based on the determination information having the highest priority.

In the game machine C7, the slave control means until the discrimination by the discrimination means, which is the newly identified discrimination result, is executed based on the update of the specific information by the information updating means. The number of times specifying means for specifying the number of times of the first effect executed between them, and the effect number information storage means for storing the effect number information corresponding to the number of times of the first effect specified by the number of times specifying means. The second effect execution means executes the second effect over the execution period of the first effect for the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means. A game machine C8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the first effect is executed until the determination by the determination means, which is the newly specified determination result, is executed based on the update of the specific information by the information update means. The number of times is specified by the number of times specifying means. The effect number information storage means stores the effect number information corresponding to the number of times of the first effect specified by the number number specifying means. The second effect is executed by the second effect execution means over the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means.

As a result, when the execution of the second effect is determined by the second effect execution determination means, the execution period of the first effect is set to the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means. Since the second effect can be executed by a simple control of setting the execution period, there is an effect that the processing load when the second effect is executed can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C8, the slave control means reduces the number of times the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means by one less, based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. The gaming machine C9 is provided with means for updating the number of effects information to be updated with the corresponding information on the number of times of effects.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C8, the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means is stored in the effect number information storage means based on the fact that the slave control means receives the determination result signal by the signal receiving means. Since the effect number information is updated to the effect number information corresponding to one less number of times by the effect number information updating means, the second effect is more reliably continued until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the determination information having the highest priority. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic D group> (The range of random numbers acquired at the time of starting prize is sent to the sub as prize information)
In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for executing main control related to a game and a slave control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is provided within a predetermined range. A judgment value generation means capable of updating and generating a judgment value, a judgment value acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value generated by the judgment value generation means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a judgment value acquisition means thereof. Corresponding to the determination means for determining whether the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value, and when the determination means determines that the determination value matches the specific value. Of the plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of, based on the control process executing means for executing the set process and the determination value acquisition means, the acquisition is performed this time. A small range specifying means for specifying which of the small ranges the determined value belongs to, and a small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means are output to the slave control means. The slave control means includes a signal output means, and the slave control means receives the signal receiving means for receiving the small range signal output by the signal output means and the signal receiving means for receiving the small range signal. D1 is a gaming machine D1 comprising:, a discrimination result specifying means for specifying a discrimination result by the discrimination means based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the determination value generated within the predetermined range by the determination value generation means is acquired by the determination value acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined acquisition condition. It is determined whether or not the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value by the determination means. When it is determined by the determination means that it matches the specific value, the process set corresponding to the specific value is executed by the control process execution means. Based on the fact that the judgment value is acquired by the judgment value acquisition means, the small range is specified which of the small ranges the judgment value acquired this time belongs to among the plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of parts. Identified by means. A small range signal indicating a small range specified by the small range specifying means is output to the slave control means by the signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, when the small range signal output by the signal output means is received by the signal receiving means and the small range signal is received by the signal receiving means, the small range indicated by the small range signal is received. The discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the discrimination result specifying means based on the above.

This has the effect that the slave control means can suitably discriminate the discriminant result by the discriminating means.

In the game machine D1, the slave control means stores the specified information storage means that stores the specified information in which the correspondence between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is defined. The discriminant result specifying means identifies the discriminant result by the discriminating means based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the specified information stored in the specified information storage means. A game machine D2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specified information that defines the correspondence between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the determination means is stored in the specified information storage means. Based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the specified information stored in the specified information storage means, the discrimination result specifying means specifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

This has the effect that the determination result can be easily specified based on the correspondence relationship specified in the specified information.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value includes at least one or a plurality of values set as a first specific value and one or a plurality of values set as a second specific value. Is provided, and the control processing execution means executes the first process when the determination value matches the first specific value, and the determination value matches the second specific value. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a second process different from the first process is executed when the above is performed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific value is provided with a plurality of types including at least one or a plurality of values set as the first specific value and one or a plurality of values set as the second specific value. When the determination value matches the first specific value, the control process execution means executes the first process, while when the determination value matches the second specific value, the control process execution means. A second process different from the first process is executed.

This has the effect of being able to execute various processes according to the types of specific values with which the determination values match.

The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, of the small ranges, the small range including the specific value is composed of only specific values of the same type.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the small range including the specific value is composed of only the specific values of the same type, so that the specific values of different types are mixed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a range or a small range in which a specific value and a value different from the specific value are mixed. Therefore, since the small range and the discrimination result by the discrimination means can have a one-to-one correspondence, there is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination result specifying means can be executed under the conditions closer to the discrimination by the discrimination means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the main control means stores at least the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means until the determination condition for executing the determination by the determination means is satisfied. The gaming machine D5 comprising a storage means, wherein the signal output means can output the small range signal to the slave control means before the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition means is stored at least by the determination value storage means until the determination condition for executing the determination by the determination means is satisfied. Before the determination condition is satisfied, the signal output means outputs a small range signal to the slave control means.

This has the effect that the slave control means can specify the discrimination result by the discrimination means before the discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine D5, the main control means includes a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the slave control means receives the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means. Based on the first effect executing means for executing the first effect indicating the determination result notified by the received determination result signal, and the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means. , The determination result that is the target of the determination based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect and the second effect execution determination means. D6 is a gaming machine D6 comprising: a second effect executing means for executing the second effect over an execution period of a plurality of the first effects including at least the first effect.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output by the discrimination result signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, based on the fact that the discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means, the first effect indicating the discrimination result notified by the received discrimination result signal is executed by the first effect executing means. Will be done. Based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means, the second effect execution determination means determines whether to execute the second effect. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determination means, the first effect is executed over a plurality of execution periods including at least the first effect indicating the determination result that is the target of the determination. 2 The second effect is executed by the effect execution means.

This has the effect that the production mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D6, the discrimination limiting state in which the discrimination by the second effect execution determination means is restricted based on the determination that the slave control means executes the second effect by the second effect execution determination means. The discriminant restriction state setting means for setting the above, and the release means for canceling the discrimination restriction state based on the execution of at least one first effect after the execution of the second effect is completed. The gaming machine D7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination that the second effect execution determination means executes the second effect in the slave control means, the determination restriction state in which the determination by the second effect execution determination means is restricted is determined by the determination restriction state setting means. Set. After the execution of the second effect is completed, the determination restriction state is released by the release means based on the execution of at least one first effect.

As a result, if at least one first effect is being executed during the execution of the second effect and after the second effect is completed, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being newly executed. Therefore, at least one first effect without the second effect can be executed from the end of the second effect to the start of the next second effect. Therefore, since the player can easily understand the timing when the second effect is completed, there is an effect that a more understandable effect can be realized.

In the gaming machine D7, the slave control means can store the discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, the discrimination result information storage means, and the release means. When the discrimination restriction state is released, the cancellation determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means, and the release determination means thereof. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the release determination means, the release of executing the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. A gaming machine D8 comprising a time execution means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the slave control means, the discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means is stored by the discrimination result information storage means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information. When the determination restriction state is released by the release means, it is determined whether to execute the second effect by the release determination means based on the plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means. Based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed by the release time determination means, the release time execution means causes the second effect to be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination. Will be executed.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, the execution of the second effect can be set without waiting for a new small range signal to be output from the main control means. Further, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect by taking into account the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means based on the small range signal output during the discrimination restriction state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect more preferably.

<Characteristic E group> (The time it takes for a right-handed ball to reach the attacker is longer than when it is left-handed)
A first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path. A ball entering means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path and the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined value based on the gaming ball entering the ball entering means. The second flow path is provided with a privilege granting means for granting the privilege of the above, and the second flow path is launched in the second direction rather than the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the period until the played gaming ball reaches the ball entry means is longer.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is awarded to the large winning opening during the hit state, so that the player can enjoy playing the game with the hit state as one pleasure. Can be made.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, so that the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that it became.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction flows down the first flow path, and the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction flows down the second flow path. Flow down. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. The second is such that the period until the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the entry means is longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means. A flow path is configured.

As a result, a player who wants to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible can launch the game ball aiming at the first flow path, while the game ball takes a relatively long time. It is possible to launch a game ball aiming at the second flow path to a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, since it is possible to select a preferred firing direction for each player and perform the game, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine E1, the ball-entry means is at a position where the rate at which the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters is higher than the rate at which the game ball flowing down the first flow path enters. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. Since the ball entry means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until reaching the ball entry means is shortened, but it becomes difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, when the ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier to enter the ball entry means, but the period until reaching the ball entry means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the firing direction that suits the taste of each player.

The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 or E2 includes a deceleration means for reducing the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the deceleration means, so that the game ball launched in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, it is possible to change the position to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means, the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating result by the discriminating means, the variable means performs the discriminant number of times from the second position. A gaming machine E4 comprising: a variable gaming execution means for executing a variable gaming variable to a first position.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result.

In the gaming machine E4, the launching means capable of launching the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and the variable means during execution of the variable game, the variable means is the second. The first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position. The variable means is subjected to the first variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the control means and the variable game. A second variable control means that is variable to two positions is provided, and during the specific period, the gaming ball is launched in the second direction at the specific firing interval after the gaming ball is started to be launched in the second direction. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the specified number of gaming balls is at least longer than the period until the specified number of gaming balls have finished flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means becomes the first based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. 1 It is variable to the second position by the variable control means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Will be done. At least a specific period from the start of firing the game balls in the second direction to the end of the specific number of game balls launched in the second direction flowing down the second flow path at specific firing intervals. Is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the game balls are launched in the second direction during the execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be entered into the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. It has the effect of suppressing the loss of a person.

In the gaming machine E4, the variable game executing means has a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after the lapse of time is controlled to be variable by the variable means in a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times, and one or more in the specific variable pattern. The execution period of the first variable operation is such that the gaming ball launched in the first direction can be reached after the specific variable pattern is started, and the first variable pattern is started. A gaming machine E6 characterized in that a gaming ball launched in two directions is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the first position, and after a predetermined first period elapses, the variable means is changed to the second position. The variable means is controlled to be variable by the variable game execution means in a specific variable pattern including the variable operation a predetermined number of times. The execution period of one or more first variable movements in the specific variable pattern is such that the game ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific variable pattern can be reached, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, there is less chance that the game ball enters the ball entry means than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, the player who wants to launch the game ball in the first direction It has the effect of being able to remind you.

In the game machine E6, as the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the first game state is set when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. The game is characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when the game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game. Machine E7.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E6, as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, the game is played when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the variable game of 1. While the first gaming state is set by the state setting means, when the gaming ball enters the ball entering means in one variable game, the gaming state setting means is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be performed during the execution of the variable game by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the first flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and the second flow path causes the flowed game ball to reach the third direction. The ball entering means is reached from a fourth direction different from that of the above, and the variable means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down the upper surface of the variable means while being changed to the second position. The fourth direction side is inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entry means is in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position. In a state where the gaming ball can be entered from above and the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the variable means is The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that it can be changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, while the game ball flowing down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. To reach. While the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means is tilted so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Are arranged. The ball entry means is configured so that the game ball can enter the ball from above in a state where the variable means is variable to the first position. Further, in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper part of the ball entry means is blocked by the variable means. The variable means is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in the direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball arriving from the third direction side to enter the ball entry means, while the game ball arriving from the fourth direction side enters the ball. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means will enter the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the second direction rather than the game ball is launched in the first direction during the execution of the variable game. It has the effect of being able to be raised.

<Characteristic F group> (Right-handed during a big hit is more advantageous than left-handed on one side, but more disadvantageous than left-handed on another side)
Specified by a launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminant condition, and discrimination by the discriminating means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, and the first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means, in which it is more advantageous for the player to keep firing the game ball in the first direction than to keep firing the game ball in the second direction during a specific period, and the first A second element different from the element is advantageous to the player if the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction rather than the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising two-element advantage means.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning, the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. There is something. In such a conventional gaming machine, by winning a game ball into the large winning opening during the winning state, a predetermined privilege such as a prize ball is given to the player, so that the player is hit. The state can be made to play a game in one fun.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the large winning opening, it is necessary to launch the gaming ball in a direction determined for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a possibility that the hit state may become a work that simply keeps firing the game ball in a fixed direction. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the conventional gaming machine to improve the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the launching means is configured so that at least the gaming ball can be launched in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. The determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination. The first factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the first direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the second direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second factor regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the award game is that the game ball continues to be fired in the second direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the first direction during a specific period included in the execution period of the award game. It is considered to be advantageous by the second element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball can be launched in the first direction to the player who wants to make the first element advantageous during the execution of the privilege game, while the second element can be made to be advantageous to the player who wants to make the second element advantageous. The game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide playability that suits the taste of each player.

In the gaming machine F1, the ball entering means provided at least at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction and the gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the ball entering means thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the ball, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the ball entering means rather than the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a variable means that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine F2 comprising a control means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter at least. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entering means. The variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the ball entry means is more difficult to enter than the first position. During the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed by the variable control means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the privilege game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the first element advantageous means is a method in which the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, it is better that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate of entering the ball into the ball entry means is increased by the first factor advantage means, the player who wants to play a game during the execution of the privilege game with a high rate of entering the ball entry means. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be positively launched in the first direction.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element advantage means means that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction rather than the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction during the specific period. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the number of gaming balls reaching the ball entry means is increased.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is more likely that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction than that the gaming ball is continuously launched in the first direction during a specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entry means is increased by the second factor advantage means, the player who wants to reach more game balls to the ball entry means is positively directed to the second direction. Has the effect of being able to fire a game ball.

In the gaming machine F4, the variable control means performs a first variable operation that is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during the specific period, and in the second element advantageous means, the gaming ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific period is the first number of times. It is intended to suppress the arrival of the ball entering means before the execution period of the variable operation ends, and at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is a period during which the gaming balls launched in the second direction can be reached after the start.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first variable operation, which is changed to the second position after the predetermined first period elapses after the variable means is changed to the first position, is executed the first time by the variable control means during a specific period. Will be done. The second factor advantage means means that the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means between the start of the specific period and the end of the execution period of the first variable operation a predetermined number of times. It is suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of a predetermined number of times is composed of a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can be reached after the start of the specific period.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the game ball reaches the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable motion more times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that more opportunities to enter the ball into the ball entry means can be obtained.

In the gaming machine F5, in the second element advantageous means, the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means is before the gaming ball launched in the second direction. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the flow speed of the gaming ball launched in the first direction is suppressed so as to be longer than the period until reaching the entry ball means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, the period until the gaming ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means is the period until the gaming ball launched in the second direction enters the ball. Since the flow speed of the game ball launched in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage means so that the period until reaching the means is longer, the game ball launched in the first direction is suppressed. , It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball entering means from being reached before the predetermined number of first variable operations are completed. Therefore, launching the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of more reliably entering the ball into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, in the first variable operation, a period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position is predetermined. The variable means is variable so as to be in the second period, and the first element advantage means means that the gaming ball launched in the second direction is sent to the ball entry means during the second period. It is said that it is easier for the gaming ball launched in the first direction to reach the ball entry means during the second period than to reach the ball entry means. Characteristic gaming machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is such that the period from the start of the variable from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable to the first position is a predetermined second period. Is variable. The game ball launched in the first direction reaches the entry means during the second period than the game ball launched in the second direction reaches the entry means during the second period. It is easier to enter the ball entry means by the first element advantage means.

As a result, when the game ball is launched in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the variable means is changed to the first position, the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position is also performed. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball into the ball entry means, it is possible to prolong the period during which the ball can enter the ball entry means by launching the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entry means enters the ball entry means when the game ball is launched in the first direction, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine F7, the gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow down, and the flowing gaming ball reaches the ball entry means from the third direction in the first flow path and in the second direction. The variable means includes a second flow path in which the launched game ball can flow down and the flowed-down game ball reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction. While being changed to the second position, the game ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball-entry means is configured so that the gaming ball can enter the ball from above in a state where the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is at the second position. In the state of being variable to, the upper part is closed by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is said to be in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means from the third direction through the first flow path. The game ball launched in the second direction reaches the ball entry means from a fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is variable to the second position, a game ball can be played on the upper surface thereof. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In the state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the ball entering means The upper part of the is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

As a result, the game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is returned to the fourth direction side by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entry means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entry means is in a state where the ball can enter from above earlier than the fourth direction side, so that the ball is launched in the first direction and is launched from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to facilitate the entry of a game ball that has reached the entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the ball entry rate when the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entry means more reliably than the game ball launched in the second direction.

In any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, when the game ball does not enter the ball-entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. 1 Game state setting means for setting a game state and setting a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game 1. The gaming machine F8, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, the gaming ball is sent to the ball entry means during the execution of the privileged game of 1. When the ball is not entered, the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entry means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that the game can be played during the execution of the privilege game by paying attention to whether or not the game is played.

<Characteristic G group> (A route that is easy to win an electric chew but difficult to win an attacker and a route that is easy to win an attacker but difficult to win an electric chew are provided on the right side)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first flow path capable of flowing down a game ball launched by the launching means with a firing intensity within a specific range, and a second flow path different from the first flow path. A first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is difficult to enter, and a first entry thereof. A privilege-giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball means, a first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball-entry means, and a position higher than the first position. Based on the fact that a variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the first ball entry means and a predetermined specific condition are satisfied, the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position. A second variable control means that can be changed to a position and a second game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball and a second game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to enter. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a ball entry means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of entrances on the board surface. More specifically, a game ball has entered, such as a start opening that triggers a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the hit state, and a large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter when the hit state is entered. Some are provided with a plurality of entrances where different controls are performed in some cases. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the gaming state, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of being able to change the firing direction according to the gaming state.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, until the gaming state is changed, it is necessary to continue firing the gaming ball in the firing direction according to the current gaming state, so that the game becomes monotonous and the player There was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, there is also a method in which a specific entry port in which a plurality of launch directions are set so that the game ball can enter is provided, and the game is performed aiming at the specific entry port in at least one game state. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced by a plurality of flow paths leading to a specific entry port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a gaming ball launched by a launching means with a firing intensity within a specific range can flow down a first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path. Become. The first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball and the game ball flowing down the second flow path is difficult to enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. The variable means is variably configured at a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the first ball entry means than the first position. There is. The variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific conditions. The second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter and the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to enter.

As a result, by launching the game ball with a firing intensity within a specific range, the game ball may flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path. Therefore, pay attention to the flow direction of the game ball. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the first flow path allows a game ball launched with a firing intensity within the first range included in the specific range to flow down, and the second flow path is in the specific range. The gaming machine G2, which is included and is characterized in that a gaming ball launched with a firing intensity within a second range different from the first range can flow down.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched with the firing intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. In addition, a game ball included in a specific range and launched with a firing intensity within a second range different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

As a result, the flow path through which the game ball flows can be different depending on whether the game ball is fired with the firing intensity within the first range or the game ball is fired with the firing intensity within the second range. The game ball can flow into any flow path of. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G2, a third flow path in which a gaming ball launched with a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down, and it becomes difficult for the flowing gaming ball to enter the second entering means. And, the game ball has entered any of the third entry means, the second entry means, and the third entry means, which allows the game ball flowing down the third flow path to enter. One from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state based on the determination means that executes the determination based on the determination and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. The first gaming state includes a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of the above, and the first gaming state is higher than the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path into the second entering means. The rate at which the game ball flowing down the flow path enters the third ball entry means increases, and in the second game state, the game ball flowing down the third flow path enters the third ball entry means. The rate at which the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means is higher than the rate at which the ball enters the second flow path, and the variable control means is specified by discrimination by the discriminating means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable means executes a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position, assuming that the determination result of the above is satisfied. G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third flow path is configured so that a game ball launched with a firing intensity outside the specific range can flow down. The game ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter the third entry means, and it becomes difficult to enter the second entry means. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. Will be done. In the first game state, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the third flow path to the third entry means is higher than the ratio of the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the second entry means. Is higher. In the second gaming state, the rate at which the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means is higher than the rate at which the game ball flowing down the third flow path enters the third entry means. It gets higher. The variable control means executes a variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times, assuming that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, in the first game state, it is possible to efficiently execute the discrimination by the discriminating means when the third flow path is allowed to flow down, while in the second game state, it is better to let the second flow path flow down. The discrimination by the discrimination means can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of switching the launch direction of the game ball according to the game state.

In the gaming machine G3, the first ball-entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. A gaming machine G4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the first entering means is at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path and the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Since it is provided, there is an effect that the player can select a favorite flow path during the execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine G4, the period until the gaming ball launched toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is such that the gaming ball launched toward the third flow path is the first. 1. The gaming machine G5 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball in the first flow path so as to be longer than the period until reaching the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the period until the gaming ball launched toward the first flow path reaches the first entry means is toward the third flow path. Since the flow of the game ball in the first flow path is suppressed by the suppressing means so that the launched game ball reaches the first ball entry means for a longer period of time, the first is earlier during the execution of the variable game. 1 For a player who wants to reach the ball entry means, the game ball can be launched aiming at the third flow path, while for a player who wants to enjoy the variable game for a longer time. , There is an effect that the game ball can be launched aiming at the first flow path.

In the gaming machine G5, the launching means can launch a game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval, and the variable control means can be used by the variable means while the variable game is being executed. The first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after being changed from the position to the first position. The variable means is subjected to the first variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position during the execution of the control means and the variable game. It has a second variable control means that is variable to two positions, and during the specific period, the specific number of balls fired at the specific firing interval after starting the firing of the game ball toward the first flow path. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the gaming ball is at least longer than the period until it finishes flowing down the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at a firing interval equal to or longer than a specific firing interval. During the execution of the variable game, the first variable control is based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of game balls have entered the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position by the means. Further, during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is moved to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. It is variable to. The specific period is longer than the period from when the game balls are launched toward the first flow path until the specific number of game balls launched at specific firing intervals finish flowing down the first flow path. It is configured to be.

As a result, when a game ball is launched into the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the first position before a specific number of game balls reach the first entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the predetermined privilege given when the game ball is launched into the first flow path during the execution of the variable game from being reduced.

In any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the first ball-entry means is more than the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path when the variable means is changed to the first position. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the gaming ball flowing down the flow path is configured to have a higher rate of entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the first flow is higher than that of the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path. Since the first ball entry means is configured so that the game ball that has flowed down the road has a higher rate of entry, the variable game is being executed for the player who does not want to generate a waste ball. There is an effect that the game ball can be launched aiming at the first flow path.

In any of the game machines G3 to G7, the third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and the fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. A second variable means that can be changed and a control means that controls the second variable means so as to be variable from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of the first condition are provided. The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the first condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second variable means is variably configured at a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. Has been done. Based on the establishment of the first condition, the second variable means is controlled by the control means so as to be variable from the fourth position to the third position. The first condition is more difficult to be satisfied in the first game state than in the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, it is possible to more reliably execute the discrimination by the discriminating means when the third flow path is allowed to flow down, while in the second game state, the second flow path is allowed to flow down. This has the effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be performed more reliably and efficiently.

<Characteristic H group> (Notifies the firing direction of the corresponding digestion time according to the mode of jackpot production)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first flow path through which the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means can flow down, and a second direction different from the first direction by the launching means. After the specific period is set by the second flow path through which the pachinko ball can flow, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the specific period setting means. Between the specific period ending means for ending the specific period and the specific period based on the fact that the second condition that can be satisfied when the game ball flows down the first flow path or the second flow path is satisfied. The specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect and the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means include at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect. It is executed by the type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the launch direction of the game ball in the specific period, and the suggestion effect executing means. As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the determination of the first specific effect by the type determining means, and based on the determination of the second specific effect. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a suggestion effect determining means for determining a second suggestion effect suggesting the second direction.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of entrances on the board surface. More specifically, a game ball has entered, such as a start opening that triggers a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the hit state, and a large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter when the hit state is entered. Some are provided with a plurality of entrances where different controls are performed in some cases. In such a conventional gaming machine, since the entrance to be aimed at is changed according to the gaming state, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of being able to change the firing direction according to the gaming state.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, until the gaming state is changed, it is necessary to continue firing the gaming ball in the firing direction according to the current gaming state, so that the game becomes monotonous and the player There was a problem that it became difficult to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, there is also a method in which a specific entry port in which a plurality of launch directions are set so that the game ball can enter is provided, and the game is performed aiming at the specific entry port in at least one game state. Although it is conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced by a plurality of flow paths leading to a specific entry port.

According to the gaming machine H1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball can flow down the first flow path, and is launched by the launching means in the second direction different from the first direction. The pachinko ball can flow down the second flow path. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the establishment of the first condition, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the game ball passes through the first flow path or the second flow path. The specific period is terminated by the specific period end means based on the fact that the second condition that can be satisfied in the case of flowing down is satisfied. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means during the specific period. As the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, one type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect. In a specific period, a suggestion effect suggesting the launch direction of the game ball is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. As the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the first suggestion effect suggesting the first direction is determined by the suggestion effect determination means based on the determination of the first specific effect by the type determination means. , The second suggestion effect suggesting the second direction is determined based on the determination of the second specific effect.

As a result, an appropriate firing direction can be suggested by the suggestion effect according to the type of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be preferably set.

The game machine H1 includes a ball-entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the second condition is , It can be established based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means, and in the second flow path, the game ball that has flowed down from the first flow path reaches the ball entry means. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the period until it is reached is likely to be long.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. The second condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The second flow path is configured such that the period until the game ball flowing down from the first flow path reaches the ball entry means tends to be longer.

As a result, when the second specific effect is determined, the period until the second condition is satisfied can be relatively extended, so that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine H2, it is possible to change between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Variable means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The specific period setting means sets the specific period as the first condition is satisfied when the execution of the variable game is started. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. Has been done. A variable game in which the discriminating means executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the variable means changes a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position based on the discrimination by the discriminating means resulting in a specific discriminant result. It is executed by the variable game execution means. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means, assuming that the execution of the variable game is started as the first condition is satisfied.

This has the effect that the effect mode can be preferably set during the execution of the variable game.

In either the gaming machines H2 or H3, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls are entered into the ball-entry means after the first condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is that a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the ball entry means after the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period until the second condition is satisfied when the game ball is launched in the second direction than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type determination means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect includes an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for enabling an operation on the means, and the second specific effect is one effect mode according to the operation content for the operation means from a plurality of effect modes. Is composed of an effect of a mode in which the player is made to select, and based on the satisfaction of the second condition, the selection effect execution of executing one effect mode selected by the player during the execution of the second specific effect. A gaming machine H5 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, the operation valid period for validating the operation on the operation means is set by the operation valid period setting means during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is composed of an effect that allows the player to select one effect mode according to the operation content for the operating means from the plurality of effect modes. Based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied, one effect mode selected by the player during the execution of the second specific effect is executed by the selected effect executing means.

As a result, when the second specific effect is executed, the player's favorite effect mode can be selected as the effect mode to be executed after the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. It has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game later.

The gaming machine H5 includes display means capable of displaying images, and in the second specific effect, a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and the plurality of images are displayed. One of the images includes at least a display mode in which the image is displayed in a specific display mode, and the specification is based on the fact that the operation of the first operation content with respect to the operation means is detected during the operation validity period. It is displayed in the specific display mode based on the mode variable means for varying the image displayed in the display mode and the detection of the operation of the second operation content with respect to the operation means during the operation valid period. The gaming machine H6 is characterized by comprising an execution setting means for setting an effect mode corresponding to an image to be an effect mode executed by the selected effect execution means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second specific effect, at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means and one of the plurality of images is displayed in the specific mode. include. Based on the detection of the operation of the first operation content with respect to the operation means during the operation validity period, the image displayed in a specific display mode is changed by the mode variable means. Based on the detection of the operation of the second operation content with respect to the operation means during the operation valid period, the effect mode corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode is selected by the execution setting means by the effect execution means. It is set as an effect mode to be executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily select the image and determine the effect by changing the operation content for the operation means.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type determination means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for urging a predetermined operation on the operation means, including an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for enabling an operation on the means. Game machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, the operation valid period for validating the operation on the operation means is set by the operation valid period setting means during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is configured to include at least an effect mode that encourages a predetermined operation on the operating means.

As a result, the player can positively operate the operating means during the execution of the second specific effect, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machines H5 to H7, an operation determining means for determining whether or not an operation for the operating means has been executed during the operating valid period, and the operation determining continuously for at least a predetermined number of times of the operating valid period. A game characterized by comprising: a determination control means for controlling the first suggestion effect to be determined by the suggestion effect execution means when it is not determined that the operation for the operation means has been executed by the means. Machine H8.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H5 to H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the operation determining means whether or not the operation on the operating means is executed during the operation valid period. The determination control means so that the suggestion effect execution means determines the first suggestion effect when it is not determined that the operation for the operation means has been executed continuously by the operation determination means for at least a predetermined number of operation valid periods. Is controlled by.

As a result, the type of suggestive effect can be determined in consideration of the tendency of the player to operate the operation means, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be set more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z2 to play. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by inserting the gaming ball into the large winning opening that is opened during the winning state, so that the player is looking forward to winning. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the hit state may be a task of simply continuing to shoot the gaming ball in a fixed direction aiming at the big winning opening. There was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest in games.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is based on a launching means capable of launching at least a gaming ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and the establishment of a discrimination condition. The discrimination means for executing the discrimination, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the advantage of the player in the privilege game. The first element regarding the degree is that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage means that is advantageous to the person and the second element that is different from the first element are placed in the second direction rather than the game ball being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. It is provided with a second element advantageous means in which it is advantageous for the player to keep firing the game ball.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction and the gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter at least in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. The provided ball-entry means, the privilege-giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball-entry means, and the ball-entry means at which the game ball can enter the ball. A variable means that can be changed to one position and a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the first position, and a first number of times that the variable means is predetermined during the execution of the privilege game. , A variable control means for varying from the second position to the first position.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the first element advantage means means that the gaming ball continues to be launched in the second direction during the execution period of the privileged game. Further, the more the game ball continues to be launched in the first direction, the higher the rate of entering the ball entering means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 or 3, in which the second element advantage means is in the second direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the first direction. When the game balls are continuously launched, the number of game balls that reach the ball entry means during the specific period is increased.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the variable control means is used after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was changed to the first position. The first variable operation that is variable to the second position is executed the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantageous means is the first after the specific period is started. The game ball launched in the direction is prevented from reaching the ball entering means by the end of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times, and the first variable of the predetermined number of times. At least a part of the execution period of the operation is a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction becomes reachable after the specific period is started.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, at least a launching means capable of launching a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and discrimination is executed based on the establishment of a discrimination condition. The first regarding the discriminating means to be performed, the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means, and the degree of advantage of the player in the privileged game. It is advantageous for the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantageous means and the second element different from the first element are launched in the second direction rather than the gaming ball being continuously launched in the first direction during the specific period. It is provided with a second element advantageous means, which is advantageous to the player if it continues to be performed.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the gaming ball launched in the first direction and the gaming ball launched in the second direction are A ball-entry means provided at least at a position where the ball can be entered, a privilege-giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball-entry means, and a game ball to the ball-entry means. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the ball can be entered and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the first position, and the variable means during the execution of the privilege game. Is provided with a variable control means for varying the number of times from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.
This has the effect of further improving the interest during the execution of the privilege game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the first element advantageous means is in the second direction during the execution period of the privileged game. Since the rate of entering the ball entering means is higher when the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction than when the game ball is continuously launched, the rate of entering the ball entering means is increased. There is an effect that a player who wants to play a game during the execution of a privileged game with high playability can positively launch a game ball in the first direction.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the second element advantage means means that the gaming ball continues to be launched in the first direction. However, if the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction, the number of game balls that reach the ball entry means during the specific period is increased, so that more game balls are inserted. There is an effect that the player who wants to reach the means can positively launch the game ball in the second direction.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the variable control means is predetermined after the variable means is changed to the first position. The first variable operation that is changed to the second position after the lapse of the first period is executed the first number of times during the specific period, and the second element advantageous means is such that the specific period is used. The game ball launched in the first direction from the start is prevented from reaching the ball entry means before the execution period of the first variable operation of a predetermined number of times is completed. At least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation a predetermined number of times is a period during which the gaming ball launched in the second direction becomes reachable after the specific period is started.
As a result, when the game ball is launched in the second direction, the game ball reaches the ball entry means during the execution of the first variable motion more times than when the game ball is launched in the first direction. This has the effect of increasing the chances of getting the ball into the ball entry means.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
100 board box (storage means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (subordinate control means)
223a Winning information storage area (information storage means)
S214 Bonus game execution means S305 Discrimination means S310 Part of the first output means S406 Discrimination information acquisition means S407 Pre-identification means S408 Part of the second output means, discrimination information signal generation means S901 Part of the first output means, second Part of output means S4111 Signal receiving means S4301 Bit setting means S4311 State setting means S4405 Predetermined processing means S4406 to S4408 Information discrimination means, first execution discrimination means, first setting means S4411 Second execution discrimination means S4412, S4414 Second production Execution means, second setting means S4505 First effect execution means

Claims (2)

The main control means that executes the main control related to the game,
In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control means.
The main control means
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions,
Based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means.
A first output means that outputs a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means to the slave control means, and
A discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination of the discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a discrimination information acquisition means.
The discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means is configured to be memorable until the acquired discrimination information is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means, up to a predetermined specific number of information. Memories and
A second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied is provided.
The slave control means
A signal receiving means configured to at least be able to receive the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means.
Based on the reception of the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal, and the first effect executing means.
Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the first execution discriminating means for determining whether to execute the second effect according to the received discrimination information signal, and the first execution discriminating means.
Based on the determination by the first execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. The first setting means to set the execution and
Based on the fact that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means, the specific information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is up to a predetermined number of pieces of information, and the corresponding discrimination result signal is the signal. An information storage means configured to be memorable until it is received by the receiving means,
A state setting means for setting a suppression state in which the setting of execution of the second effect is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and
Predetermined processing for performing predetermined processing according to a predetermined rule at a time for all the specific information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined predetermined condition. Means and
A means for storing a predetermined data, which is a data composed of a group of data and is a result of the predetermined processing, in a predetermined storage area.
When the predetermined specific condition is satisfied after the suppression state is set, the termination means for terminating the suppression state and the termination means.
A second execution determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined storage area when the specific condition is satisfied.
Based on the determination by the second execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. With a second setting means to set the execution ,
The predetermined condition is composed of at least a condition that can be satisfied between the time when the suppression state is set and the time when the determination by the second execution determination means is executed.
The predetermined data is data that can at least identify whether or not the specific information stored in the information storage means includes the specific information based on the discrimination information corresponding to the specific discrimination result. Consists of
The specific condition, the gaming machine characterized by conditions der Rukoto capable established when a new determination can be executed by said discrimination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a storage means capable of storing the main control means.

Images